JP2015024238A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of lightening a processing load.SOLUTION: If an ordinary symbol jackpot at the time when the ordinary symbol display result in an ordinary state is the "ordinary symbol jackpot", the start port opening time is set at 100 ms (milliseconds). If the ordinary symbol display result at the time when the ordinary display result in an ordinary state is the "ordinary symbol jackpot" is the "second ordinary symbol jackpot", the start port opening time period is set at 4000 ms (milliseconds). If the game ball having entered (or passed) into the starting winning port in the open state is detected by a starting port switch and if a detection signal from the starting port switch is ON, it is decided whether the special symbol display result is made into the "big hit" or the "small hit". When it is decided that the special symbol display result is the "jackpot", the control is made into not the small hit game state but the jackpot game state after the end of the special symbol game.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are Some are paid out as prize balls (prize). In addition, a predetermined specific display result (big hit) is derived and displayed as a display result in the variable display of identification information such as special symbols started by the variable display unit based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. There is a gaming machine that controls to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state. Here, the derivation display is to stop and display the identification information, and does not include a stop before so-called re-variation. In the big hit gaming state, for example, the big winning opening is opened until a predetermined number of times (for example, “15”) is reached, and a round that makes it easy for the game ball to win is executed.

  In addition, when a predetermined open display result (small hit) is derived and displayed as the display result of the identification information, the starting operation is changed from a closed state where the game ball cannot enter to an open state where the game ball can enter A gaming machine that includes a variable winning device that performs (opening operation), and that controls a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) by a V winning in which a game ball enters a V winning region as a specific region provided in the variable winning device. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-79687 A

  With the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is a risk that the processing load increases.

  This invention is made in view of the said actual condition, and aims at provision of the game machine which can reduce a processing burden.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application is in a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can pass through a start area (for example, a start winning opening). ) And a second state (for example, a closed state) incapable of passing, a variable starting means (for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 61), and a first special state (for example, a first open door) advantageous to the player The open state of the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 by the 76A and the second open door 76B, or the open state of the big prize opening, etc. and the second special state disadvantageous for the player (for example, the first open door 76A). And a special state variable means (for example, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) that can be changed to a closed state of the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 by the second opening door 76B, or a closed state of the big prize opening, etc. , Opening and closing 16), and the special state variable means can change to the first special state based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, and the game medium passes through the special state variable means. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of giving a predetermined gaming value (for example, control to a big hit gaming state or paying out a prize ball) based on the situation, wherein the variable starting means is the first A first variable state that changes to the first state in a manner that game media can easily pass through the start area (for example, the start type according to the second map per “second map”). Or a second variable state in which the game medium is less likely to pass through the starting area than in the first variable state (for example, the type per a normal figure). The first determination means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of step S465) that determines whether or not the start winning award is to be opened according to “per 1st map”, and the special state variable Second determining means for determining whether or not to change the means to the first special state (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of step S204), and the second determining means is in the first variable state. Regardless of whether the game medium sometimes passes through the start area or whether the game medium passes through the start area when in the second variable state, the special state variable means is set in the first state according to a common process. It is determined whether or not to change to a special state (for example, the CPU 56 performs the process in step S204 regardless of whether the type per map is “per 1st map” or “per 2nd map”). Therefore, the special map display result is determined).
According to such a configuration, the processing burden can be reduced.

(2) Alternatively, a game medium (for example, a game ball) that has passed through a special start area (for example, a start prize opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61) provided in the game area (for example, the game area 7) is detected. Special start detection means (for example, a start port switch 60), an open state in which a game medium can enter based on detection of a game medium by the special start detection means, and a closed state in which a game medium cannot enter A variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 20) that performs a starting operation that changes to (for example, an opening / closing operation of an accessory entrance in a small hit gaming state), and a plurality of areas provided in the variable winning device Specific detection means (for example, a specific area switch 66a) for detecting a game medium that has passed through a specific area (for example, the specific prize opening 66A), A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the entered game medium has been detected by the specific detection means, Starting operation control means (for example, a part where the CPU 56 executes the processes of steps S114 to S116) for performing control when the starting operation is executed, and entry detecting means for detecting the game medium that has entered the variable winning device ( For example, a first prize winning switch 71a, a second prize winning switch 72a, etc.), and a discharge detecting means (for example, a bonus discharge switch 85a) for detecting game media discharged from the variable prize apparatus, The variable prize winning device can guide the game medium to any one of the plurality of areas (for example, the first path 900A and the second path 90). B) and a stopping device (for example, the first storage member 93a, the second storage member 93b, etc.) that temporarily stops the game medium on the guide route, and the starting operation control means has a fixed stop release time. When the elapse of time (e.g., first pre-opening time T10 or second pre-opening time T11) elapses, the stop device is moved to move the stop device to release the game medium stop state (e.g., After the CPU 56 executes the processes of steps S286 and S287, the process of step S330 is executed based on the determination of Yes in step S329, and the process of step S334 is executed based on the determination of Yes in step S333). The guidance route includes a first route (for example, the first route 900A, etc.), and the game medium is more specific than the first route. A second path (for example, the second path 900B) configured to increase the probability of passing through the region, and the stopping device temporarily stops the game medium on the second path. Means (for example, the second storage member 93b), and the variable winning device changes to the open state by the start operation, and then the first path among the game media that have entered the variable winning device. A first time (for example, the first required discharge time T1H, etc.) until a game medium that has passed through the second path is detected by the discharge detection means is detected by the discharge detection means. It is configured to be shorter than a second time (for example, the second discharge required time T2H, etc.) until the stop state canceling means has the variable winning device changed to the open state by the start operation. When a third time longer than the first time (for example, second pre-opening time T11, etc.) elapses, a high-probability canceling unit (for example, CPU 56) that cancels the game medium holding state by the high-probability stopping unit. May be configured to include a portion that executes the process of step S334 based on the determination of Yes in step S333 after the process of step S287 is executed.
In such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (2), a plurality of types of special identification information (for example, special symbols) that can be identified based on the detection of the game medium by the special start detection means are variably displayed. Special variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, special symbol display 8) and normal start detection means for detecting a game medium that has passed through a normal start area (for example, gate 32) provided in the game area (for example, And a plurality of types of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) that can be identified based on the detection of the game medium by the normal start detection means and variably display the display result. Normal variable display means (for example, the normal symbol display 10), and a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the normal variable display means (for example, per first normal map or A normal variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning ball device) that changes the special start area from a closed state in which a game medium cannot enter to an open state in which a game medium can enter 61) and a normal effect display that displays an effect image based on the variable display of the normal identification information by the normal variable display means (for example, decorative patterns shown in FIGS. Variable display, etc.) and special effect display that displays an effect image based on the variable display of the special identification information by the special variable display means (for example, effect display using an effect control pattern at the time of special figure variation and FIG. 75 (A1)) (A2) effect display device that executes a small hitting effect shown in FIG. 75B, a small hitting end effect shown in FIG. 75B, and a big hit end effect shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B. , Effect display control means for performing control to execute the special effect display in preference to the normal effect display (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S472 based on the determination of No in step S470). And the effect display CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps S704 to S710), and the effect display control means is configured to perform the normal operation when the special effect display ends. Normal variable display determination means for determining whether or not the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed by the variable display means (for example, the part where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S514, or the effect control CPU 101 performs the process of step S906. And the normal variable display determination means Therefore, when it is determined that the variable display is being executed, a normal effect display control means (for example, a step by the CPU 56) that performs control to execute the normal effect display in a different effect mode according to the remaining time of the variable display. Based on the pattern change process at the time of return to normal fluctuation in S516, the effect control CPU 101 may include a part for executing the processes in steps S701 to S703.
In such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of the above (3), the effect pattern of the normal effect display may be a plurality of types with different effect execution times (for example, ordinary variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 to PA2-4, Production pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 56 changes the normal map in the process of step S493) to determine any one of PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the normal map fluctuation production control pattern corresponding to these normal map change patterns. A part for determining a pattern, a part for the effect control CPU 101 to determine an effect control pattern for a normal figure change in step S811 based on the normal figure change pattern determined at this time, and the normal effect display control means. , The remaining time of the variable display of the normal identification information is within a predetermined range (for example, in the case of “usually lost”, 4000 ms or more and less than 31000 ms) The range of 16500 ms or more and less than 36000 ms in the case of “per standard”, etc., among the plurality of types of effect patterns that can be determined by the effect pattern determination means. Any one of the production patterns associated in advance for each remaining time (for example, in the case of “usual figure loss”, one of the ordinary figure variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1, PA2-2, In the case of “per normal map”, the normal effect display is executed using either the normal pattern change pattern PA3-1 or PA3-2 (for example, the CPU 50 executes the processes of steps S654 to S666 and S672 to S675). Or the like).
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity for executing the normal effect display.

(5) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (4), after the specific gaming state is ended, until the variable display count of the special identification information by the special variable display means reaches a predetermined count. Meanwhile, after the special game state control means (for example, the CPU 56 executes the processing of steps S442 to S452), the normal variable prize-winning device controls the special variable game state (for example, advantageous state) more easily than the normal game state. And the effect display control means in the special effect display before the special game state control by the special game state control means ends in the special effect display. An effect display at the time of start (for example, an effect image based on the number of times controlled to a specific gaming state is displayed corresponding to the execution of the start operation (for example, 75 (A1) and (A2), a start effect display control means (for example, based on the processing of S311 by the CPU 56) that performs control to execute the effect during the small hit shown in FIG. 75 (B2) or the effect at the end of the small hit shown in FIG. The CPU 101 for effect control performs steps S875 to S879 after the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S872, and the effect control CPU 101 performs steps S893 and S361 based on the process of step S356 and the process of step S361 by the CPU 56. The start-time effect display control means responds to the end of the start-up operation without the game medium being detected by the specific detection means, and the like, including the part that executes the processes of steps S900 to S904 after the process of S897 is executed. When the special effect display ends, the remaining variable display of the normal identification information remains. The normal effect display using the effect pattern is started by changing the execution time of the start effect display according to the time difference between the time and the effect execution time of the normal effect display using the effect pattern. The start-time effect display may be executed (for example, the portion for repeatedly executing the processes of steps S900 to S904 until the effect control CPU 101 determines Yes in step S906).
In such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively prevent an increase in data capacity for executing the normal effect display.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), when determining whether or not the display result of the special identification information is the specific display result and the open display result Special display result determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that determines which of a plurality of predetermined opening display results (for example, special symbols of symbol numbers “1” to “10”) is selected. CPU 56 executes a process of steps S205 and S210) and a start operation control means (for example, a part where CPU 56 executes a process of steps S114 to S116) that performs control when the start operation is executed. The starting operation control means is configured such that the opening display result determined by the special display result determining means is derived and displayed on the special variable display means. A start operation start means (for example, the CPU 56) starts the execution of the start operation when a different start waiting time (for example, the pre-opening time T03) elapses according to the type of the open display result thus derived and displayed. After performing the process of S285, based on the determination of Yes in step S291, etc., the part which performs the process during the opening of the accessory of step S115, etc.) may be included.
In such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (6), the variable winning device forms the second path, and moves to the front of the effect display device by moving. A movable member (for example, a movable member 77) that allows the game medium that has passed through the second route to be guided to the plurality of regions including the specific region; When the game medium holding state in the high probability stopping means is released by the above, the movable member control means for moving the movable member (for example, the CPU 56 sets the movable member lowering time T12 in step S288, and then step S341). Based on the determination of Yes in step S342, and the like.
In such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(8) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (7), the display result of the normal identification information is set as the predetermined display result based on detection of the game medium by the normal start detection means. Normal display result determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S465) is provided, and the effect display control means includes a plurality of types that can be identified in the normal effect display. Decoration variable display control means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S702 and S703) for performing control to variably display decoration identification information (for example, decoration symbols) and to display and display a display result; Reach determination for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decoration identification information is set to the reach state based on the determination result by the normal display result determination means When the determination of the reach state is made by the reach determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 56 executes the processes of steps S481 and S489) and the determination result by the normal display result determination means Reach effect mode determination means (for example, a part that executes the process of step S493 after the CPU 56 executes one of the processes of steps S482 and S490) that determines the reach effect mode to one of a plurality of types at different ratios; The decoration identification for determining the type of the decoration identification information constituting the reach state from a plurality of types of the decoration identification information at different ratios depending on the type of the reach presentation mode determined by the reach presentation mode determination means. Information determining means (for example, the same figure set by the production control CPU 101 in step S803) By referring to the determination table 140A, it may be configured so as to include a portion, etc.) and to determine identity symbols at step S805.
In such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural examples, such as a main board (game control board). It is a block diagram showing circuit configuration examples such as an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the progress procedure of a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for games. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a common figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the small hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a usual figure. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table at the time of reach, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of a common figure fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a start winning prize release operation | movement control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the time setting table before an accessory release. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an accessory release operation | movement control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an accessory release operation | movement control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for production. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the same symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the effect control pattern etc. at the time of a usual figure change. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process thing pre-release process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-process release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-process release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a common figure fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pattern determination process at the time of a common figure return. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pattern determination process at the time of a common figure return. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member initial position control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-hit effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit effect production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process after a small hit. It is a figure which shows the operation example in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the operation example in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a timing chart showing an example of operation control which performs starting operation etc. It is a timing chart showing an example of operation control which performs starting operation etc. It is a timing chart showing an example of operation control which performs starting operation etc. It is a timing chart showing an example of operation control which performs starting operation etc. It is a timing diagram showing an example of operation control when the special effect display ends. It is a timing diagram showing an example of operation control when the special effect display ends. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the effect image used as the effect at the time of a small hit, and the effect at the time of the end of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the effect image used as a jackpot end effect.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In general, the gaming machine includes a gaming machine that performs a so-called variable display game and a gaming machine that performs a so-called accessory game. In this embodiment, a combination of a so-called variable display game and an accessory game is used. The case of the type of game to be performed will be described. Here, a gaming machine that performs a so-called variable display game is a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit when a game ball that is a game medium that has passed through the start winning opening (start winning prize) is detected. ) Is a gaming machine that shifts to a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) when a predetermined specific display mode (specific display result) is derived and displayed as the variable display display result. In addition, a so-called game machine for performing an accessory game is a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an operation (starting operation) from a closed state where a game ball cannot be won to an open state where a game ball can be won when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game state is specified based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through a specific area (also referred to as “V winning area”) provided in the variable winning ball apparatus (V winning area). A gaming machine configured to shift to a state. Hereinafter, for example, a game ball entering (passing through) a predetermined area as a winning area, such as a winning opening, may be referred to as “winning”.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame (front door frame) 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with operation buttons 120 that can be operated by the player. In addition, at a lower portion of the hit ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a speed at which the game balls are fired by a predetermined hit ball launching device (that is, game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 5 for adjusting the strength of the spring for repelling the ball. On the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card, or a cash ball lending that enables lending according to the amount of money by inserting cash A machine may be attached.

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 5. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 5 to the right (clockwise), the speed of the game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases. The played game balls enter the left area of the game area 7 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 5 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 7 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 5 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device, and to adjust the area into which the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including, for example, a plate-like body formed of a substantially square plywood and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, for example, a guide rail in which a stainless steel plate is formed in an arc shape is attached. Then, the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device is driven so as to be guided into the substantially circular game area 7 formed by the guide rail.

  A variable winning ball device (variable winning device) 20 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 7. Further, on the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, there is provided an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 that forms a start winning opening as a special start area. Note that the starting winning opening allows a game ball to be won when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in an open state (also referred to as an open state). In addition, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in a closed state (also referred to as a closed state), the game ball cannot be won at the start winning opening. It should be noted that when the normally variable winning ball device 61 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the start winning opening than when the normally variable winning ball device 61 is in the closed state. Also good. In this case, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the closed state, the game ball is not completely unable to win, but compared to when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the closed state. It may be difficult. A game ball (winning ball) that has entered (passed through) the start winning opening is detected by the start opening switch 60 and guided to the back of the game board 6. Based on the fact that the start opening switch 60 has detected a game ball, a number of game balls corresponding to a predetermined start winning payout number (for example, “4”) are paid out as prize balls.

  A special symbol display 8 serving as a special variable display means for variably displaying special symbols as special identification information is provided in the lower right of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The special symbol display 8 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED formed in a square shape, a dot matrix LED, and the like. The special symbol (also referred to as “special diagram”) is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). As an example, the special symbol display 8 variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols configured to include a part of numbers indicating “00” to “99”. In addition, as the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8, for example, a plurality of types including all of the numbers indicating "00" to "99" may be set in advance. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance, including symbols indicating “-” and the like, in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED is different.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, in this embodiment, symbol numbers “1” to “11” may be attached to some of the numerical values indicating “00” to “99”. For example, a symbol number may be attached to a symbol or the like indicating “-”. Also, more symbol numbers than “1” to “11” are attached to some or all of the numerical values indicating “00” to “99”, symbols indicating “−−”, and the like. May be.

  The variable display of the special symbol is a special figure start condition (for example, for starting the variable display after the special figure start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, that the hit ball has won the start winning opening) It starts based on the fact that the special symbol variable display has not been executed and the jackpot game has not been executed), and when the variable display time has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived. indicate. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display a display symbol (example of identification information) prepared in advance such as a special symbol.

  Below the special symbol display 8, a state indicator lamp 18 for displaying the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. In the status indicator lamp 18, for example, the number of lighting of a plurality of LEDs is changed according to which of a plurality of types of gaming state (for example, normal state, advantageous state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.). In addition, the game state is displayed so as to be specified by changing the color of light emitted from the LED.

  When a game ball won in the start winning opening is detected by the start opening switch 60 and a predetermined number (or symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. Be controlled. By opening / closing control, the open doors 76A and 76B provided above the variable winning ball apparatus 20 are interlocked and opened, whereby the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is open and the open doors 76A and 76B are interlocked. By returning to the closed state, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed. The state where the variable winning ball device 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch is referred to as a starting operation state or a small hit gaming state. The opening operation in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is also referred to as a starting operation. The variable winning ball apparatus 20 may also be called an accessory. Here, the game board 6 may be provided with various bonuses. However, in the following description, when simply referred to as “a bonus”, it means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  An effect display device 9 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 20. The effect display device 9 serves as a decoration variable display unit that variably displays (variably displays) a decoration symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information that can be distinguished from each other, unlike a special symbol. In this embodiment, in the display area of the effect display device 9, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are provided.

  Above the special symbol display 8, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 serving as a normal variable display means for variably displaying normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information that can be distinguished from each other. When a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 serving as a normal start area provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays a variable variable of the normal symbol (also known as a normal game). Say) is started. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to include six LEDs that are alternately lit in green and red, and the six LEDs arranged in the vertical direction are lit in green and lit in red. By alternately changing to, normal symbols are variably displayed. For example, if the six LEDs are lit in green at the end of variable display and stop, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal”. On the other hand, for example, if the six LEDs are lit red at the end of the variable display and stop, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal game becomes “normal map loss”. When the variable display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game is “per ordinary”, the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened for a predetermined time. In the upper left of the normal symbol display 10 (lower right of the effect display device 9), a normal symbol start memory indicator for displaying the number of reserved memories (ordinary number of reserved memories) as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate 32. 41 is provided. The normal symbol start memory display 41 is configured to include a display such as four LEDs, for example. Each time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the number of LEDs to be lit is increased by one. On the other hand, each time the normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  An opening / closing plate 16 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 21 is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The opening / closing plate 16 changes an opening portion serving as a big winning opening between an open state and a closed state. As an example, when the solenoid 21 is in the off state, the open / close plate 16 closes the large winning opening, while when the solenoid 21 is in the on state, the opening / closing plate 16 opens the large winning opening. A game ball (winning ball) that has entered the open big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. Based on the fact that the count switch 23 has detected a game ball, a number of game balls corresponding to a predetermined payout amount (for example, “15”) are paid out as prize balls.

  Also, a winning opening (normal winning opening) 33 is provided below the gate 32, a winning opening (normal winning opening) 38 is provided at the upper left of the big winning opening, and a winning is provided at the upper left of the winning opening 38. A mouth (normal winning mouth) 39 is provided. The game balls won in the winning openings 33, 38, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a, respectively. Based on the detection of a game ball by any one of the winning opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a, a number of game balls corresponding to a predetermined normal payout number (for example, “10”) are paid out as prize balls. In this way, the winning openings 33, 38, 39 constitute a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting a game ball as a game medium and allowing winning. Note that the start winning opening also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening and inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  On the game area 7, the big winning opening and the winning opening 33 opened and closed by the gate 32 and the opening / closing plate 16 may be formed as an integrated member 34. The winning opening 33 is located directly below the gate 32, and only game balls that have passed through the gate 32 can win the winning opening 33. Specifically, on the game area 7, arc-shaped members 30 projecting arcuately on the left and right sides of the gate 32 are provided on the left and right sides of the gate 32. It is in a state covered with the member 30. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to win the winning opening 33 only when the game ball passes through the gate 32, and the gaming ball enters the winning opening 33 from the other direction by being blocked by the arcuate member 30. There will be no winnings. In order to make it possible for only the game balls that have passed through the gate 32 to enter the winning opening 33, for example, instead of the arcuate member 30, the upper portion of the winning opening 33 is covered (the gaming ball can pass through). A plurality of nails may be arranged (so that there is no gap).

  A projecting portion 33b projecting to the front side (in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the upper surface side, the projecting portion 33b projects in a triangular shape to the front side) is provided at the lower portion of the winning opening 33. Is provided. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 first hits the protruding portion 33b and wins the winning opening 33 when it jumps to the rear side successfully. In addition, although it has passed through the gate 32, when it hits the protruding portion 33b and jumps leftward or rightward, it may not win well at the winning opening 33. Further, a nail hole 32b in which a nail can be arranged is provided between the gate 32 and the winning opening 33, and a nail is arranged in the nail hole 32b or an angle of the arranged nail is adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to change the probability that a game ball that wants to pass through the gate 32 wins the winning opening 33.

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and there is an out port 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize at the bottom. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. A decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the like) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 as viewed from the upper right side. As shown in FIG. 2, two open doors including a first open door 76 </ b> A and a second open door 76 </ b> B are provided above the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20. Further, two advance entrances including a first entrance 71 and a second entrance 72 (not shown in FIG. 2) through which game balls enter are provided above the variable winning ball apparatus 20. . Note that the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 are collectively referred to as “community entrance”. When the first opening door 76A is in the closed state, the first opening 71 is covered with the first opening door 76A, and the game ball cannot enter the first opening 71. When the second opening door 76B is in the closed state, the second opening 72 is covered by the second opening door 76B, and the game ball cannot enter the second opening 72. On the other hand, when the first open door 76 </ b> A is opened, the first entrance 71 is opened, and the game ball can enter the first entrance 71. When the second opening door 76 </ b> B is opened, the second entrance 72 is opened, and the game ball can enter the second entrance 72.

  The first open door 76A and the second open door 76B do not completely cover the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 in the closed state, but partially cover them. You may do it. In this case, when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the closed state, the game ball is first compared to when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the open state. You may make it difficult to approach the 1st entrance 71 and the 2nd entrance 72, respectively. In addition, when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the open state, the game ball is in the first entrance 71 compared to when the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are in the closed state. And it may be made easy to enter the second entrance 72 respectively. In this embodiment, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are integrally formed as one component. Therefore, the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B are interlocked with each other and controlled to the open state at the same timing, and controlled to the closed state at the same timing.

  The game ball that has entered (passed through) the first entrance 71 opened by the first opening door 76A is detected by, for example, a first prize winning switch 71a shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered (passed through) the second entrance 72 opened by the second opening door 76B is detected by, for example, a second prize winning switch 72a shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first prize winning switch 71a or the second prize winning switch 72a, a number of game balls corresponding to a predetermined prize winning number (for example, “7”) are prize balls. As paid out.

  Inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a decoration member 78 is provided below the open doors 76A and 76B. On the back side of the decorative member 78, a movable member 77 (not shown in FIG. 2) that moves in conjunction with the decorative member 78 is provided. The decoration member 78 is formed in a shape imitating a sword, for example, and is decorated with a color corresponding to the sword. The decorative member 78 is disposed on the front side of the area where the game ball passes inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 so as not to affect the behavior of the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Has been placed. The movable member 77 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 78 and is formed using a transparent or substantially transparent synthetic resin, and is viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, viewed from the player side). It is covered with the decorative member 78 and cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to visually recognize).

  A rotating body 86 that can be driven to rotate is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The rotator 86 is provided with an opening 66 on the top surface for guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening 66A (see FIG. 11B, etc.). By entering the provided opening 66, a special winning opening 66A as a specific area can be won. Here, the specific winning opening 66A is also referred to as a V winning opening. Further, the rotating body 86 is also provided with an opening 66b that guides the game ball to the specific winning opening 66A on the side surface, and is configured to be able to win the specific winning opening 66A when the game ball enters the opening 66b. Yes. Hereinafter, the opening 66 leading to the specific winning opening 66A is also referred to as a specific opening, and the side opening 66b leading to the specific winning opening 66A is also referred to as a specific side opening.

  The opening / closing operation of the open doors 76A and 76B and the position changing operation (movement) of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 will be described. FIG. 3 is a front view of the opening / closing mechanism portions of the open doors 76A and 76B of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the movable mechanism portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the opening / closing mechanism portions of the open doors 76A and 76B of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the movable mechanism portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 as viewed from the upper right side. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the open doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are integrally formed via a connecting portion 76 </ b> C. Specifically, the open doors 76A and 76B are integrally formed by molding in advance using a synthetic resin material or the like. The open doors 76A and 76B may be integrally formed by fabricating and assembling the open doors 76A and 76B and the connecting portion 76C as separate parts. An opening solenoid 75 for opening and closing the opening doors 76A and 76B is disposed on the back side of the opening doors 76A and 76B. The open doors 76A and 76B are controlled to be in an open state in conjunction with the open solenoid 75 being driven (on state). Further, the open doors 76A and 76B are controlled to be closed in conjunction with each other when the drive of the open solenoid 75 is stopped (off state). In the example shown in FIG.3 and FIG.4, the state by which open door 76A, 76B is controlled by the closed state is shown. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the open doors 76A and 76B are closed, the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 are closed by the open doors 76A and 76B. The game ball cannot enter the entrance 71 and the second entrance 72.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a rotating body first position sensor 87 a and a rotating body second position sensor 87 b for detecting the rotation position of the rotating body 86 are disposed below the rotating body 86. The rotating body first position sensor 87a and the rotating body second position sensor 87b may be used for detecting an abnormality of the rotating body 86 in addition to detecting the rotational position of the rotating body 86.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the opening and closing mechanism and the movable mechanism when the open doors 76A and 76B are opened. As shown in FIG. 5, by setting the opening solenoid 75 in a driven state, the opening doors 76A and 76B are driven to rotate counterclockwise about the lower side of the opening doors 76A and 76B. It becomes. In addition, when the opening doors 76A and 76B are opened, a path of game balls to the first advancement entrance 71 and the second advancement entrance 72 is formed, and the first advancement entrance 71 and the second advancement entrance 72 are formed. The game ball is ready to enter. Here, at least the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B that are integrally formed have predetermined surface portions 76a and 76b, and the surface portions 76a and 76b are open and the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B. It is possible to guide the game ball to the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 by forming an upper inclined surface and being positioned below the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B.

  Each of the first opening door 76A and the second opening door 76B serves as a tray for guiding the game ball to the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 in the opened state. Here, the second open door 76B is formed to be smaller than the first open door 76A. Accordingly, the second advancement inlet 72 has a smaller receiving tray for game balls than the first advancement entrance 71, and the game balls are less likely to enter than the first advancement entrance 71.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the first open door 76 </ b> A and the second open door 76 </ b> B are each controlled to protrude obliquely upward in the open state. By such control, the game balls that have dropped onto the surface portions 76a and 76b serving as the trays of the first open door 76A and the second open door 76B in the open state are inclined upward at the first open / close door 76A and the second open door 76B, respectively. It is made easy to be guided to the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 through the surface portions 76a and 76b to be surfaces. It should be noted that the first opening 71 and the second opening 72 are not limited to those provided with the first opening door 76A corresponding to the first opening 71 and the second opening door 76B corresponding to the second opening 72. One open door may be provided in common. In this case, it is only necessary that the game ball rolling on the surface portion serving as a tray when the open door is in the open state can be guided to the first entrance 71. On the other hand, it is only necessary for the second advancement entrance 72 to be able to enter a game ball or the like jumped off at the surface portion serving as a tray.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, two bolt-shaped members 77 </ b> A and 78 </ b> A each having a spiral surface groove are disposed on the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Of these, the bolt-shaped member 77A is fitted with a nut-shaped member 77C having an inner surface formed with a spiral groove. The nut-shaped member 77C is connected to the movable member 77. The bolt-shaped member 78A is fitted with a nut-shaped member 78C having an inner surface formed with a spiral groove. The nut-shaped member 78C is connected to the decorative member 78. The nut-shaped members 77C and 78C have spiral grooves formed on the inner surfaces so as to engage with the grooves formed on the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the nut-shaped member 77C is located on the back side of the nut-shaped member 78C.

  Below the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A, a movable member drive motor 77B for moving the movable member 77 and a decorative member drive motor 78B for moving the decorative member 78 are arranged. The bolt-shaped member 77A is rotationally driven by a movable member drive motor 77B. The nut-shaped member 77C slides between a groove formed on the surface of the bolt-shaped member 77A and a groove formed on the inner surface of the nut-shaped member 77C in accordance with the rotational drive of the bolt-shaped member 77A. It moves up or down (up and down) along 77A. Thereby, the arrangement of the movable member 77 connected to the nut-shaped member 77C is changed according to the vertical movement of the nut-shaped member 77C. The bolt-shaped member 78A is rotationally driven by a decorative member drive motor 78B. The nut-shaped member 78C slides between a groove formed on the surface of the bolt-shaped member 78A and a groove formed on the inner surface of the nut-shaped member 78C in accordance with the rotational drive of the bolt-shaped member 77A. Move up or down (up and down) along 78A. Thereby, the arrangement of the decorative member 78 connected to the nut-shaped member 78C is changed according to the vertical movement of the nut-shaped member 78C. In the example shown in FIG.3 and FIG.4, the state which nut-shaped member 77C, 78C is located in the uppermost part is shown. In this state, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are disposed in a horizontal state inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  FIG. 6 is a front view of the opening / closing mechanism portion and the movable mechanism portion when the nut-like members 77C and 78C are moved downward most as viewed from the front. The nut-shaped member 77 </ b> C is connected to the left end portion of the movable member 77. The nut-like member 78C is connected to the left end portion (sword tip portion) of the decorative member 78. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the nut-like members 77C and 78C move downward, the left end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are lowered downward according to the movement of the nut-like member 77C. The member 78 is disposed in a state inclined obliquely downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion. In this case, as shown in FIG. 6, when the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are arranged in a state inclined obliquely downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion, the front of the effect display device 9 (game) The display area of the effect display device 9 is overlapped between the person and the effect display device 9). That is, the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are configured to be able to advance to the front surface of the effect display device 9 by moving.

  A rail member is provided at the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78, and the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 only need to be able to move slightly in the left-right direction. Here, as the left end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are lowered, the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are pulled leftward. At this time, the right end portions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are moved leftward by the rail member, thereby enabling an appropriate arrangement in an inclined state.

  The decorative member 78 is equipped with a sword drive motor 79 (see FIG. 14) for opening and closing the decorative member 78 itself. When the decorative member 78 is inclined obliquely downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion as shown in FIG. 6, the decorative member 78 is opened by driving the sword drive motor 79 (in this example, , The sword is opened in two in the longitudinal direction). Here, when the decorative member 78 is in a closed state, the movable member 77 is covered with the decorative member 78 and cannot be viewed when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the decorative member 78 is in the open state as shown in FIG. 6, the movable member 77 located on the back side of the decorative member 78 can be viewed from the front. The movable member 77 is formed using a transparent or substantially transparent synthetic resin material, and forms a part of a passage route for guiding the game ball. Therefore, when the decoration member 78 is in the open state, the game ball passing through the inside of the movable member 77 can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the movable winning ball apparatus 20, position sensors 91a and 91b for detecting the positions of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are arranged. Specifically, the upper position sensor 91a is arranged above the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A, the arrangement of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 is changed upward, and the nut-shaped members 77C and 78C are located at the uppermost position. Then, a detection signal indicating that the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are detected by the upper position sensor 91a is output. In addition, the lower position sensor 91b is disposed below the bolt-shaped members 77A and 78A, the arrangement of the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 is changed downward, and the nut-shaped members 77C and 78C are in the lowest position. The lower position sensor 91b outputs a detection signal indicating that the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 have been detected.

  A path through which a game ball passes inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described. The variable winning ball apparatus 20 is roughly divided into two passage paths through which game balls are guided from above to below. Specifically, the first route (normal route) for guiding the game ball entered from the first entrance 71 that can be entered when the first open door 76A is opened, and the second open door 76B open. There is provided a second route (special route) for guiding the game ball that has entered from the second entrance 72 that can be entered by entering the state. Here, the first entrance 71 is easier to enter than the second entrance 72, but when passing through the first route, the specific winning opening 66A or the exhaust is compared with passing through the second route. While reaching the exit 83 in a short time, it is difficult to win the specific winning opening 66A. On the other hand, the second entrance 72 is less likely to enter than the first entrance 71, but when passing through the second route, the specific winning opening 66A is compared with passing through the first route. Alternatively, it takes a long time to reach the discharge port 83 and easily wins the specific winning port 66A.

  A description will be given of a first route through which the game ball that has entered from the first entrance 71 is guided when the first opening door 76A is opened. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a first route (normal route) 900A provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. A game ball that has entered (passed through) the first entrance 71 is detected by a first prize winning switch 71 a provided in the vicinity of the first entrance 71, and then to the left inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Led. Then, it is guided to the lower left in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 through the path member 92 provided on the left side in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. As shown in FIG. 7, a first storage member 93 a that is movable back and forth with respect to the front direction is provided at the lower left of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the game ball guided through the path member 92. The 1st storage part as a stopping device which stores (stops) once is formed. In the vicinity of the first storage part in the lower left part of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, there is provided a discharge port 83 for entering the first entrance 71 and discharging the second and subsequent game balls guided from the first path 900A. It has been.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing the periphery of the first storage member provided on the lower left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. As shown in FIG. 8, a first storage portion decoration portion 90 e that is movably disposed so as to overlap the first storage member 93 a is provided on the lower left side of the variable winning ball device 20. Based on the control of the production control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 14), the first storage unit decoration unit 90e is a timing at which the storage state (stop state) of the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball device 20 is released, for example. Depending on the operation by the operation button 120, etc., the movable state (to vibrate without moving forward or backward) or similar to the movable state of the first storage member 93a (toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) It is moved in a manner of moving forward and backward). The first reservoir decoration portion 90e is a decorative member provided so as to be movable in the same manner as the first reservoir member 93a, and does not contact the game ball and acts on the course of the game ball. Absent.

  FIG. 9 illustrates an aspect in which the game ball guided from the first path 900A by entering the first entrance 71 is stored, and an aspect in which the storage state of the game ball stored in the first storage unit is released. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, the game ball guided through the path member 92 is in a state where the course is blocked (stored) by the first storage member 93a. Further, when two or more game balls further enter the first entrance 71 and are guided through the path member 92, they are already stored in the first storage section as shown in FIG. 9B. It is repelled by the game ball and discharged from the discharge port 83. Here, a first storage solenoid 90a (see FIG. 13) for driving the first storage member 93a is disposed on the lower left rear surface of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Then, by driving the first reservoir solenoid 90a, the first reservoir member 93a moves (withdraws) in the back direction.

  With the retraction of the first storage member 93a, the storage state (stopped state) of the game balls stored in the first storage unit is released (released), and the released game balls are variable as shown in FIG. 9C. It is guided downward in the winning ball apparatus 20. An inclined portion 73 that is inclined obliquely downward toward the rotating body 86 is provided in the lower portion of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The game ball is guided to the front side of the rotator 86 and rolls on the inclined portion 73, and then enters the openings 66b and 84 of the rotator 86 (opening led to the specific winning port 66A, or an opening to be disconnected). To do. Note that a synthetic resin transparent plate extending upward is provided on the front side (stage end) of the inclined portion 73 so that the game ball guided to the front side does not fall from the front side of the stage. Just do it. As shown in FIG. 9C, when the first storage member 93a is retracted in the back direction and the first storage part is controlled to be in the open state, the first storage part position sensor 90c is turned off.

  The rotating body 86 is provided with a specific side surface opening 66b in a side surface portion adjacent to the specific opening 66 provided on the upper surface. When the game ball is led to the front side of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the side surface on which the specific side surface opening 66b of the rotating body 86 is provided faces the front side, the gaming ball is stored in the specific side surface opening 66b. To enter the specific winning opening 66A. Specifically, the specific winning opening 66A is provided so as to be positioned below the rotating body 86, and the game ball that has entered the specific side opening 66b is further provided at the specific winning opening provided below the rotating body 86. Enter 66A. In addition, a specific area switch 66a is provided in the specific winning opening 66A, and a game ball (V winning ball) that has entered (passed through) the specific winning opening 66A is detected by the specific area switch 66a. Note that the game ball that is won at the specific winning opening 66A and detected by the specific area switch 66a may be further detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a.

  The rotating body 86 is provided with a plurality of side surface openings 84 together with the specific side surface opening 66b. If the game ball is not guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the side surface on which the specific side opening 66b of the rotating body 86 is provided faces the front side, the gaming ball is opened to the specific side opening. It cannot enter 66b, and enters the side opening 84 other than the specific side opening 66b. In this case, the game ball cannot be awarded to the specific winning opening 66A provided below the rotating body 86, and is discharged from the discharge opening 83 provided on the side of the rotating body 86. Note that an accessory discharge switch 85a is provided at the discharge port 83, and a game ball discharged from the discharge port 83 is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. In addition, the game balls that have entered the first entrance 71 after the second and discharged from the discharge port 83 are also detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a.

  As an example, if the size of the opening portion of the specific side surface opening 66b is “1”, the total size of the opening portions of all the side surface openings 86 provided on the side surface of the rotating body 86 is “9”. Thus, each opening is formed. Accordingly, the game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 and led to the first path 900A enters the specific side opening 66b with a probability of 1/10 and wins the specific winning opening 66A, and the specific area switch 66a. Is detected. That is, a V winning is generated with a probability of 1/10 and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Thus, when the storage state (rest state) of the game balls stored in the first storage unit is released (released), the game balls guided to the front surface side of the rotating body 86 are the specific side surface opening 66b and the side surface. It can be guided to any of a plurality of areas such as the specific winning opening 66A and the discharge opening 83 through the side opening 84 or the like.

  A description will be given of the second route through which the game ball that has entered from the second entrance 72 when the second opening door 76B is opened. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a second route (special route) 900B provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. A game ball that has entered (passed through) the second entrance 71 is detected by a second prize winning switch 72 a provided in the vicinity of the second entrance 72, and is provided above the variable winning ball apparatus 20. It is guided to the upper right in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 through the path member 94. A second storage member 93b that is movable to the left and right is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning ball device 20, and a second stopping device as a stopping device that temporarily stores (stops) the game ball guided through the path member 94. 2 reservoirs are formed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball that has entered from the second entrance 72 and led through the path member 94 is temporarily stored (stopped) in the second storage section. The first prize winning switch 71a and the second prize winning switch 72a are also collectively referred to as an “act winning prize switch”.

  A second reservoir solenoid 90b for driving the second reservoir member 93b is disposed on the upper right rear surface of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. When a predetermined time elapses after the game ball is once stored (stopped) in the second storage portion, the second storage member 93b is driven by driving the second storage portion solenoid 90b as shown in FIG. 10 (B). Is moved (retracted) to the left, and the second reservoir is opened (stop released). With the retraction of the second storage member 93b, the storage state of the game ball once stored in the second storage unit is released, and the released game ball is guided downward inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20, and inside the movable member 77 To be introduced. Further, by driving the movable member drive motor 77B and the decorative member movable motor 78B, the variable member 77 and the decorative member 78 move in cooperation, and the movable member 77 and the decorative member 78 are inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left. It is movable to the state. At this time, the decorative member 78 is opened in two in the longitudinal direction by driving the sword drive motor 79.

  By moving the movable member 77 in an obliquely inclined state, the movable member 77 advances to the front surface of the effect display device 9, and the game ball guided from the second storage unit passes through the inside of the movable member 77, It is guided to a path member 95 provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 20. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10B, since the decoration member 78 is controlled to be opened in two in the longitudinal direction, the game ball passing through the inside of the movable member 77 can be viewed from the front. It is. The path member 95 provided below in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is slightly inclined obliquely downward from the left to the right, and the game ball guided to the path member 95 is It rolls inside and is guided to the right and falls onto the upper surface of the rotating body 86.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the game ball after dropping onto the upper surface of the rotating body 86. As shown in FIG. 11A, the rotator 86 rotates in the clockwise direction at a constant speed. The rotating body 86 may be driven to rotate counterclockwise at a constant speed, or the rotating direction may be reversed at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the rotating body 86 does not always rotate, and is controlled so as to start the rotating operation from a predetermined initial position, for example, when starting the control of the starting operation to open the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Also good. Further, the rotational speed of the rotating body 86 may be set to be variable according to a plurality of rotational operation patterns prepared in advance. A specific opening 66 is provided in a region of the outer periphery on the upper surface of the rotating body 86, and a specific side surface opening 66 b and a plurality of side surface openings 84 are provided on the side surface of the rotating body 86. In addition, a plurality of groove-shaped portions 96 for guiding game balls are formed on the upper surface of the rotating body 86, and the game balls dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 are identified through any of the groove-shaped portions 96. It is guided to the opening 66 or the side opening 84.

  FIG. 11B shows the movement of the game ball when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the specific opening 66 is located on the front side with respect to the player. The rotating body 86 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward from the back direction to the front direction with respect to the player, and the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 is caused by the inclination on the upper surface of the rotating body 86. It rolls in the front side direction through the groove shape portion 96. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, since the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 rolls the upper surface of the rotating body 86 in the front direction (front side). Enter the opening 66. Then, a winning is made at a specific winning opening 66A provided below the rotating body 86, and as shown in FIG. 11B, a special area switch 66a provided in the specific winning opening 66A detects and discharges a bonus item. It is detected by the switch 85a. Note that a wall portion 66c is provided in an outer peripheral portion where the specific opening 66 is provided on the upper surface of the rotator 86, and the game ball with the upper surface of the rotator 86 facing the specific opening 66 gains momentum. It does not jump over 66 and jump out of the rotating body 86 to the front side.

  FIGS. 11C and 11D show the movement of the game ball when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at the timing when the specific opening 66 is positioned on the side facing the front side with respect to the player. Show. A wall portion 66d is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the region facing the region where the specific opening 66 is provided on the upper surface of the rotator 86, and the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotator 86 is It rolls in the direction of the wall portion 66d through the groove-shaped portion 96 due to the inclination on the upper surface of. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 11C, the game ball is blocked from traveling by the wall portion 66 d and is temporarily stored on the upper surface of the rotating body 86. Next, when the rotating body 86 is rotated clockwise and the specific opening 66 is located on the front side with respect to the player, as shown in FIG. 11D, the rotating body 86 is temporarily stored near the wall 66d. The game ball rolls in the front side direction through the groove-shaped portion 96 due to the inclination on the upper surface of the rotating body 86. In the example shown in FIG. 11D, since the specific opening 66 is located on the front side, the game ball once stored near the wall portion 66d rolls the upper surface of the rotating body 86 in the front direction and is specified. Enter the opening 66. And it wins in the specific winning opening 66A provided under the rotary body 86, and it detects with the special area switch 66a, and also detects with the accessory discharge switch 85a. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 and has passed through the second path 900B falls on the rotating body 86 at the timing when the specific opening 66 is located on the front side, and the specific opening 66 faces the front side. There are cases where the specific winning hole 66A is won and detected by the specific area switch 66a and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a at two types of timings, that is, when it falls to the rotating body 86 at the side position. .

  When the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at a timing other than the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side and the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the side facing the front side, The game ball that has fallen on the upper surface falls to the side surface side of the rotating body 86 through the groove-shaped portion 96 according to the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating body 86.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, groove-shaped portions 96 are formed in six directions on the upper surface of the rotating body 86, and are shown in FIGS. 11B, 11C, and 11D. Thus, when guided to the two-way groove shape portion 96 of the six-direction groove shape portions 96, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the specific winning opening 66A and be detected by the specific region switch 66a. . Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 and led to the second path 900B enters the specific opening 66 with a probability of 1/3 and wins the specific winning opening 66A, and is detected by the specific area switch 66a. And is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. That is, a V winning is generated with a probability of 1/3 and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Thus, the game ball guided to the upper surface of the rotator 86 via the second path 900B is higher than the game ball guided to the front surface side of the rotator 86 via the first path 900A. With a probability, the player enters the specific winning opening 66A and is detected by the specific area switch 66a.

  FIG. 12 shows a game ball when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 at a timing other than the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the front side and the timing at which the specific opening 66 is positioned on the side facing the front side. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion. In this case, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 falls to the side surface side of the rotating body 86 through the groove-shaped portion 96 due to the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating body 86 as shown in FIG. In this case, if the game ball enters the side opening 84 as it is after falling to the side surface of the rotator 86, the game ball cannot enter the specific winning opening 66A. It is discharged from the discharge port 83 provided on the side of (i.e., disengaged). Specifically, each side-side opening 84 provided on the side surface of the rotating body 86 has a shape that is recessed inward so that a game ball that has flowed down to the side surface is fitted, for example, as shown in FIG. It has become. And the depth in the hollow part of the side opening 84 is formed to a size that does not reach the specific winning opening 66A provided below the rotating body 86. Therefore, the game ball fitted in the side opening 84 is guided to the left side of the rotating body 86 according to the rotational drive of the rotating body 86 without winning the specific winning opening 66A. A discharge port connection port 83a connected to the discharge port 83 is provided on the left side of the rotating body, and the game ball guided to the left side of the rotation body 86 is guided to the discharge port 83 from the discharge port connection port 83a. , And detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a.

  On the other hand, even if it falls to the side surface side of the rotating body 86, the game ball may stay on the inclined portion 73 without entering the side surface side opening 84 due to bouncing with the dropped momentum. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the specific side surface opening 66b is next positioned on the front side due to the rotation of the rotating body 86, the game ball staying on the inclined portion 73 is specified. It may enter the side opening 66b and enter the specific winning port 66A, and may be detected by the special region switch 66a and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. Therefore, even if the game ball entering the second entrance 72 and passing through the second path 900B cannot fall into the specific opening 66 on the upper surface of the rotating body 86 and falls to the side surface side, the specific side opening 66b is further dropped. There is a possibility of entering into the specific winning opening 66A. If the opening located on the front side next is the side opening 84 other than the specific side opening 66b due to the rotation of the rotating body 86, the game ball is specified even if the game ball stays on the inclined portion 73. The winning opening 66A cannot be won, and is discharged from the discharge port 83 through the discharge port connection port 83a provided on the left side of the rotating body 86, and is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a (that is, ) In this way, when the storage state (stop state) of the game balls stored in the second storage unit is released (released), the game balls guided to the upper surface or the side surface of the rotating body 86 can be It can be guided to any one of a plurality of regions such as the specific winning port 66A and the discharge port 83 through the side opening 66b, the side opening 84, and the like.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the accessory discharge switch 85a for detecting the game ball won in the specific winning opening 66A and the accessory discharge switch 85a for detecting the game ball discharged from the discharge port 83 are separately provided. Provided. On the other hand, a game ball may be detected using only one accessory discharge switch 85a. For example, the path through which the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 66A and the path through which the game ball has entered the discharge port 83 are merged on the back side of the game board 6, and one feature is included in the path after the merge. A discharge switch 85a may be provided to detect both the game ball that has won the specific winning port 66A and the game ball that has entered the discharge port 83.

  Two sensors for position detection are provided in the vicinity of the rotating body 86. As an example, the two sensors may be disposed at a position separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a position opposite to the center of the rotating body 86 by 180 degrees). Each sensor includes, for example, a light emitting element such as a light emitting diode and a light receiving element such as a photodiode or a phototransistor installed so as to sandwich the rotating body 86. In the lower part of the rotating body 86, a slit (hole) is provided in a disk member that rotates together with the rotating body 86. The slit is formed at a predetermined position in the inner region of the rotating body 86. Specifically, if the disk member rotates with the rotating body 86 and the region including the slit comes to a position corresponding to the sensor installation position, the light from the light emitting element is allowed to pass to the light receiving element side. Good. In addition, each light receiving element provided for each sensor constitutes a rotating body first position sensor 87a and a rotating body second position sensor 87b, respectively. As an example, the rotating body first position sensor 87a and the rotating body second position sensor 87b detect the slit when the side of the rotating body 86 where the specific opening 66 and the specific side surface opening 66b are provided reaches the front side. It is provided in the position to do. In this case, at the timing when the side where the specific opening 66 and the specific side surface opening 66b of the rotating body 86 are provided reaches the front side, the rotating body first position sensor 87a and the rotating body second position sensor 87b send an ON signal. Output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 7. When the hit ball passes through the gate 32, it is detected by the gate switch 32a. When this gate passage detection is detected (process P101), a general-purpose hold memory is generated (process P102). This ordinary figure holding memory is a holding memory indicating that the ordinary figure starting condition for executing the ordinary figure game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 10 is established, and has a predetermined upper limit such as four upper limits. The usual game can be put on hold within the range of the number of memories. When the general symbol hold memory is generated in the process P102, the LED to be lit on the normal symbol start memory display 41 is increased by one.

  In this way, based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 serving as the normal starting area, the normal game is executed, and the normal symbol display 10 performs variable display of the normal symbol (process P103). Here, the normal game by the normal symbol display 10 is performed when a normal start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, a predetermined time has passed since the previous general game was finished. It only has to be started. In this normal game, after the start of the change of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, a fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed (stop display). At this time, as a fixed normal symbol, for example, a normal symbol that becomes a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary winning symbol) such as that the six LEDs on the normal symbol indicator 10 are lit in green is a predetermined probability (for example, If the display is stopped at a probability of 1/50 in the normal state), the normal map display result as a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal map”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, for example, six LEDs are lit in red on the normal symbol display 10, the universal symbol display result is “normal symbol”. It will be “losing”.

  Then, when the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol becomes “usual figure losing”, if there is further an ordinary figure hold memory, the process returns to the process P103 and the next ordinary figure game is executed. Return to P101. On the other hand, when the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game is “per normal game”, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is in the closed state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start winning opening was opened. The starting winning opening is returned (process P104). During the period in which the start winning opening is open, the game ball can enter the start winning opening. In this embodiment, “per 1st general map” and “per 2nd general map” are prepared in advance as per-normal map types in the case where the normal map display result is “per normal map”. In the following, there are cases where the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal map”, including the type per normal map, and the “normal map display result”. When the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the type per map when the base map display result is “per base map” is “per base 1” or “second base”. Depending on whether it is “per figure”, the start opening time, which is the time for the start winning opening to be opened, is varied. Note that the normal state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state as a big hit state, a small hit state, or a special game state, and the probability that the variable display result in the normal game will be “per normal game” is a pachinko machine. 1 is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state (for example, a state in which initialization processing is executed after power-on as in the case where a system reset is performed).

  For example, if the normal map display result is “per normal map” in the normal state and the per normal map type is “per first general map”, the start opening time is set to 100 ms (milliseconds). The On the other hand, if the normal map display result is “per normal map” in the normal state, and the per normal map type is “per second general map”, the opening time of the start port is 4000 ms (milliseconds) Set to When the start winning opening is thus opened, if there is a start winning, start winning detection is performed (process P105). Here, the start winning detection of the process P105 is that the starting ball switch 60 detects a game ball that has entered (passed through) the start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 61. Further, even if the start winning opening is in an open state, if there is no start winning, if there is a general figure hold memory, the process returns to the process P103 and the next general game is executed. Return to.

  In this embodiment, no special memory is held for the special figure game, and when the start winning is detected in the process P105, for example, the fact that the previous special figure game has been completed and the start operation is performed. If a predetermined condition such as a winning game state or a big winning game state in which a big winning opening is opened is satisfied, a special game using a special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is executed. (Process P106). In the special symbol game using the special symbol display 8, after the special symbol variable display is started, when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses, a fixed special symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is derived and displayed (stop). indicate. At this time, as the confirmed special symbol, for example, a special symbol that becomes a predetermined special symbol (big win symbol) such as a special symbol having the symbol number “11” is a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1 / 183.5). If the display is stopped, the special display result as the variable display result of the special symbol becomes “big hit” in response to the specific display result being derived and displayed. On the other hand, a special symbol predetermined as a special symbol (small bonus symbol) other than the big hit symbol, such as one of the special symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “10”, for example, has a predetermined probability (for example, If the stop display is performed at a probability of 182.5 / 183.5, etc., the special figure display result is “small hit” corresponding to the open display result being derived and displayed.

  Thus, in the special symbol game with the special symbol display 8, the special symbol display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, becomes the “big hit” as the specific display result and the “small hit” as the open display result. There is a case. On the other hand, the special figure display result may be a “special figure loss” that is different from the specific display result or the predetermined display result. When the special figure display result is “special figure losing”, the process returns to the process P103 if there is a general figure hold memory, and the normal figure game is executed, whereas if there is no special figure hold memory, the process returns to the process P101. Note that the special game and the special game can be executed in parallel with each other, for example, before the special graphic display result is derived and displayed after the special symbol variable display in the special game is started. The variable display of the normal symbol in the usual game may be started based on the occurrence of the figure holding memory. On the other hand, after the special symbol variable display in the special figure game is started, the normal game in the normal game is continued until the small hit game state or the big hit game state based on the special figure display result in the special figure game is finished. You may make it restrict | limit (regulate) execution of a general game so that the variable display of a symbol may not be started.

  When the special symbol variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the starting operation is executed (process P107). In this embodiment, “first small hit” to “seventh small hit” are prepared in advance as small hit types when the special figure display result is “small hit”. Hereinafter, the special symbol variable display result may be referred to as “special drawing display result” including the small hit type when the variable symbol display result is “small hit”. Then, depending on whether the small hit type is “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”, the operation mode (open mode) when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened by the start operation is set. Make it different. For example, if the small hit type when the special figure display result is “small hit” is “first small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to 1700 ms (milliseconds) by the start operation. ), After being opened only once, it is returned to the closed state and the starting operation is completed. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “small hit”, the types of the small hits are “second small hit”, “third small hit”, “fifth small hit” to “seventh small hit”. In any case, after the opening / closing operation for returning the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the open state for 320 ms by the start operation is repeated up to four times, the start operation is completed by returning to the closed state. Depending on whether the small hit type is “second small hit”, “third small hit”, “fifth small hit” to “seventh small hit”, it is repeatedly opened up to four times. Different intervals. Furthermore, depending on whether the symbol number of the small hit symbol that has become a confirmed special symbol when the special symbol display result is “small bonus” is “1” to “10”, the confirmed special symbol is displayed. The time before opening of the accessory is varied from the completion until the opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is started by the starting operation.

  When a game ball that has entered the inside of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 opened by the start operation in the process P107 wins (passes) the specific winning hole 66A that is a specific area and a V winning is generated, the big winning hole is opened. The game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which a round is performed (process P108). On the other hand, when the game ball that has won (passed) in the specific area is not detected and the small hit gaming state is ended without any V winning, the process returns to the process P103 if there is an extra-pending memory and the next While the game is executed, if there is no usual figure storage, the process returns to the process P101.

  When the special symbol variable display result is “big hit”, regardless of whether or not the game ball that has won (passed) the specific winning opening 66A is detected by the specific area switch 66a, the process proceeds to process P108 and is a big hit. Controlled to gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, a round that becomes a specific action of a predetermined action unit can be executed, and the big winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening and closing plate 16 is opened from the closed state as the second state to the first state. It becomes a state. As an example, the open / close plate 16 is driven by a solenoid 21 so that a predetermined time (for example, 29000 ms) has elapsed after the grand prize opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 9). In response to the occurrence of the winning ball, the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state. The unit of operation until such a special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed again to the closed state is defined as one round. In addition, the number of rounds at the big hit (also referred to as the maximum round value or the maximum opening number of the big prize opening) as the maximum number of times that the round can be repeatedly executed (can be continued) in the big hit gaming state is “5”, “ It is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “10” and “15”. Here, the big hit game state in which the number of rounds at the big hit is determined to be “15” is more games than the big hit game state in which the number of rounds at the big hit is set to “5” or “10”. It is possible to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a ball, which is advantageous for the player.

  The number of rounds at the big hit is multiple, depending on whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “Big Bonus”, or the special symbol game in which the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “small bonus” Any one of the types may be determined. In this embodiment, a small hit based on the case where the special symbol variable display result is “big hit” and that the small hit symbol having the symbol number “10” is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. When a V winning is generated in the gaming state, the number of rounds in the big hit in the big hit gaming state controlled correspondingly is “15”. In addition, when a V winning is generated in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that any of the small hit symbols having the symbol numbers “6” to “9” is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, The number of rounds at the big hit in the big hit gaming state controlled correspondingly is “10”. Furthermore, when a V prize is generated in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that any one of the small hit symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “5” is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, The number of rounds at the big hit in the big hit gaming state controlled correspondingly is “5”. It should be noted that the starting operation executed in the small hit gaming state only needs to be counted as one round in the number of rounds in the big hit when the V winning is generated in the small hit gaming state.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, unlike the normal state, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, it is controlled to an advantageous state as a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the advantageous state, for example, the control for making the normal symbol change time, which is the change time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, by the normal symbol display 10 shorter than that in the normal state or the variable display result in each normal symbol game is “ Control to improve the probability of “per normal” than in the normal state, etc., and the opening time and the number of times the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” The special game is executed by increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters an open state where the game ball enters the start winning opening, such as a control that increases the game ball more than in the normal state or a combination of some or all of them. By increasing the possibility that the condition (special drawing start condition) is satisfied, advantageous opening control (high opening control) that is advantageous to the player is performed. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an advantageous state, the probability that the normal map display result will be “per normal map” is higher than the normal state (for example, a probability of 1/5). Furthermore, regardless of whether the type per base map is “per 1st base map” or “per 2nd base map” when “per base map” is selected, the start prize opening is in an open state. Is set to 4000 ms. In the advantageous state, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in which the special figure change time and the variable display time of the decorative symbols in the special figure game are shortened as compared with the normal state in addition to the advantageous release control. It may be.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to be in an advantageous state until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number. Then, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state is set to any one of a plurality of types according to the circumstances controlled to the big hit gaming state. For example, in the advantageous state, the game ball enters the specific winning opening 66A (V winning) in the starting operation state based on the result that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “small hit”, so that the big hit gaming state is obtained. When controlled, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to “10”. In addition, when the special figure display result in the special figure game in the advantageous state is “big hit”, the game is executed in the advantageous state that is controlled after the big hit gaming state is controlled. The upper limit number of possible special figure games is set to “15”. The game ball is controlled to the big hit game state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 66A (V win) in the start operation state based on the special figure display result in the special figure game being “small hit” in the normal state. In such a case, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to “3”. In the normal state, when the special figure display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, the game can be executed in the advantageous state controlled after the big hit gaming state is controlled. The upper limit number of special figure games is set to “5”. It should be noted that when the big hit gaming state is controlled, the advantageous state ends, and when the big hit gaming state ends, the advantageous state may be started again.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” variable display portions 9L, 9C, 9R are associated with variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game by the normal symbol display 10. A variable display of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is performed. In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions 9L, 9C, 9R. The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state refers to a specific combination (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right”) of variable display portions 9L, 9C in which decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 are predetermined. , 9R is a part of a combination of the same decorative symbols), and a display state in which variation continues for decorative symbols that are not yet stopped (also referred to as “reach variation symbols”) Or, it is a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the specific combination. Specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R) are predetermined. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium” variable display portion) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbols constituting the specific combination (for example, decorative symbols indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) are stopped and displayed. 9C, etc.) or the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or the decorative symbols are all or part of the specific combination in all or part of the variable display portions 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right” This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting a part.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9, but also the sound effect output operation by the speaker 27, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, the decorative lamp, and the decorative lamp. A lighting operation (flashing operation) of a decorative light emitter such as an LED may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before entering the reach state. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach effect modes) may be prepared in advance. In each reach production mode, the possibility that the normal map display result will be “per normal map” (also referred to as “reliability”) is different.

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, for example, by displaying the effect image such as a predetermined character image or message image, the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, There is a possibility that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be “per normal map”, and whether the per-normal map type will be “per first general map” or “per second general map” (especially the per-normal map type is There is a case where a floating notice effect is executed for the player to be able to specify the possibility of becoming “per second map”. For example, when the variable display portion 9L, 9C, and 9R starts variable display of the decorative symbols, the final decorative pattern is a fixed decorative symbol. What is necessary is just to be performed (started) within a predetermined period from when the display is derived and the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. Furthermore, a plurality of types of changing notice effects such as “button operation notice” and “step-up action” may be set to be executable. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect during change may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (ordinary figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the change notice of “button operation notice”, for example, the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player during the variable display of the decorative pattern. By changing the sound output from the speaker 27, the presentation operation is changed. As an example, in the notice effect of “button operation notice”, a predetermined effect operation that becomes a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of decorative symbols. The button operation promotion effect is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9. If it is. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is not limited to the effect display device 9 that displays the effect image. The effect operation that causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined sound and the decorative light emitter to a predetermined lighting pattern. May be one that is turned on or blinking, one that causes the production movable member provided inside or outside the game area 7 to operate in a predetermined operation mode, or a combination of some or all of them.

  When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 120 by the player is set. When an operation of the operation button 120 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and for example, a plurality of types prepared in advance Displaying any one of the effect images on the effect display device 9 or causing the speaker 27 to output a sound effect corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance. Various production operations are executed.

  In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an effect in which a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the effect display device 9. Depending on the operation, a step-up effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed. Note that in the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is initially displayed in a predetermined order) is displayed. The effect display in the changing notice effect may be terminated without switching the effect image. In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, the effect mode is operated in a plurality of types according to a predetermined order, for example, the effect movable member is operated in a plurality of stages. An effect operation that changes (steps up) may be performed. Note that in the “step-up operation” during the change notice effect during the change, after the effect movable member performs the effect action in one type of operation, the effect in the notice effect during change is not switched to the second stage effect operation. The operation may be terminated.

  As described above, the notice effect during fluctuation of the “step-up operation” is a kind of effect operation that is executed within a predetermined period from the start of variable display of normal symbols and decorative symbols until the display result is derived and displayed. In particular, this is an effect operation in which the aspect of the effect operation (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. As an example, in this embodiment, as the number of times of change (the number of steps) increases, the possibility that the universal map display result, which is a variable display result in the regular game, becomes “per normal map” (reliability) increases. Become. Alternatively, as the number of times of change (number of steps) increases, the possibility (reliability) that the type of per map is “per second map” may be increased. In addition, depending on the number of steps in the changing notice effect during the “step-up operation” or the effect mode in each step, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes a reach state, a specific reach effect is executed, A notice may be given that the result of the usual map display is “per ordinary figure”, the type per ordinary figure is “per second ordinary figure”, or the like. Further, the object to be notified may change depending on the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “super reach determination” when going to the second step, “confirmation per common map” when going to the third step, and “confirmation per second map” when going to the fourth step may be used. As a change (step-up) of the production mode, different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. Also good. In other words, any means can be used as long as it can be recognized that the state of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  Further, when a game ball that has entered one of the first advance entrance 71 and the second advance entrance 72 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 opened by the start operation is detected, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed. The player specifies whether or not the game ball is guided to the second route 900B as a special route, and the V winning expectation degree as an expectation degree that the game ball enters the specific winning opening 66A by the effect operation. You may be made to perform the notice effect at the time of winning a prize for alert | reporting possible. For example, the play operation that becomes the advance notice effect at the time of winning is the timing when the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected by the first winning combination winning switch 71a or the second winning combination winning switch 72a. What is necessary is just to be performed (started) within a predetermined period before the storage state (stationary state) is released (released) in the first storage unit or the second storage unit. Further, for example, a plurality of types of winning announcement effects such as “character message display” and “effect image display” may be set to be executable.

  In the winning announcement effect of “character message display”, an effect operation is performed in which the character image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 notifies a predetermined message. In this embodiment, as an example of the message by the character image, it is possible for the player to specify which of the first route 900A and the second route 900B the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball device 20 is guided to. To be notified.

  In the “notice effect display” winning announcement effect, an effect operation is performed such as displaying a predetermined effect image different from the “character message display” winning announcement effect in the display area of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, as an example, the player is notified of the V winning expectation degree in an identifiable manner by the display mode of the effect image in the notice effect at the time of winning of “effect image display”.

  Further, for example, in a predetermined period in which the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 that has been opened by the start operation enters the storage state (stopped state) in the first storage unit or the second storage unit. After displaying the effect image indicating the power bar on the display device 9, the V winning expectation degree notification effect for notifying the V winning expectation degree is provided by changing the scale display of the power bar in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120. It may be executed.

  If the result of the normal map display in the general game is “per normal map”, for example, by displaying an effect image prepared in advance in the display area of the effect display device 9, A per-female notification is made to notify that “per figure” has been reached. Then, when the special symbol variable display in the special game is executed based on the detection of the game ball that has entered (passed through) the open start winning opening, the special symbol variable display is supported. Special effect display, for example, by displaying an effect image prepared in advance in the display area of the effect display device 9, has priority over normal effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to variable display of normal symbols in ordinary game And executed.

  In addition to the effect operation that displays the effect image in the variable display of the decorative symbols, the normal effect display for the normal effect display is “per figure” in the normal game, and the start winning opening is released from the closed state. It is only necessary to include an effect operation for notifying the normal map that notifies that the state changes.

  In the special effect display, in addition to the effect operation that displays the effect image corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the jackpot notification that displays the effect image for notifying that the special figure display result is “big hit” A big hit effect that displays an effect, an effect image in the big hit gaming state, a big hit end effect that displays an effect image corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is "small hit" A small hit notification effect for displaying an effect image for notification, a small hit effect for displaying an effect image in the small hit gaming state, and a small hit end indicating the effect image corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state It is only necessary to include special effects such as effects in the special symbol game variable display and various effect operations executed based on the special graphic display result that is the variable display result. It should be noted that, instead of or together with the effect display such as the normal effect display and the special effect display, a sound effect for outputting a predetermined sound or sound effect from the speaker 27, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right Illumination effect for turning on / off / flashing light-emitting members such as part or all of the frame lamp 28c and other decorative light-emitting members, movable effect for operating a movable member for effect such as the decoration member 78, or a part thereof Alternatively, a production operation combining all of them may be executed.

  When the small win game state ends without generating a V prize or when the big hit game state ends, the execution of the special effect display is also ended. At this time, the display is returned to the normal effect display, and the decorative display variable display corresponding to the normal display variable display in the normal game can be executed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board (game control board) 31, an effect control board 80, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 as shown in FIG. Has been. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 177 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board may be disposed on the back surface of the game board 6 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 31 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 31 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 80, and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. Further, the main board 31 controls turning on / off of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the special symbol display 8 to control the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, or the normal symbol display A function for controlling variable display of a predetermined display symbol is also provided, such as control of variable display of a normal symbol in a normal game by performing 10 on / off / coloring control. The main board 31 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560. An output circuit 59 for transmitting a drive signal such as a solenoid to the outside of the main board 31 is mounted.

  The effect control board 80 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 31, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 177, receives the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and the decoration. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts including the illuminant and the like are mounted. That is, the effect control board 80 is an electrical component for effects such as the display operation in the effect display device 9, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 27, or all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the decorative light emitter. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound output board 70 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and is used to output sound from the speaker 27 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp driver board 35 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80, the top frame lamp 28a and the left frame lamp 28b. In addition, a lamp driver circuit that performs lighting / extinguishing / coloring driving in a decorative light emitter such as the right frame lamp 28c is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main board 31 has a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 60, a first winning prize winning switch 71a, a second winning prize winning switch 72a, a specific area switch 66a, an accessory discharging switch 85a, a winning prize. Various switches such as mouth switches 33a, 38a, 39a, count switch 23, upper position sensor 91a, lower position sensor 91b, rotating body first position sensor 87a, rotating body second position sensor 87b, and first reservoir position sensor 90c. Wiring for transmitting detection signals from various sensors is connected. The main board 31 has a movable solenoid 62 for opening and closing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 16, and an opening solenoid 75 for opening and closing the opening doors 76A and 76B. Various solenoids such as a first reservoir solenoid 90a for moving the first reservoir member 93a and a second reservoir solenoid 90b for moving the second reservoir member 93b, a movable member drive motor 77B for moving the movable member 77, and a rotating body Wiring for transmitting a drive signal is connected to various motors such as a rotational drive motor 87 for rotationally driving 86.

  In addition to the wiring for transmitting command signals for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, etc., the main board 31 includes the status indicator 18, the normal symbol hold storage display 41, etc. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control is connected. In addition, the main board 31 is equipped with an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer. May be.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 31 toward the effect control board 80 is relayed by the relay board 177. The main board 31 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 177, for example, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 560, for example, as shown in FIG. The included output port 571 is connected. The output buffer circuit included in the output port 571 can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 177, and the signal input from the relay board 177 to the main board 31 is possible. To prevent. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 or the relay board 177 side to the main board 31 side.

  For example, a transmission direction regulating circuit 177A as shown in FIG. 14 may be provided on the relay board 177 for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit 177A includes a diode having an anode connected to a main board connector corresponding to the main board 31 and a cathode connected to an effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 80, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit 177A can prevent signals from being input from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177, and allow signals to pass only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 side to the main board 31 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit 177A is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 177, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 560 and the main board side connector on the main board 31. By providing the output port 571 including a circuit, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 31 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 177 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling the display operation of the effect image on the effect display device 9, an audio control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 27, and a decoration light emitter. Lamp control commands used for controlling lighting operations and the like are included. FIG. 16A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 16A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  The effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal in units of 1-byte (8-bit) effect control command data. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, from the production control microcomputer 100, the production control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of production control command data. The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize, for example. “Recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal is changed, and “recognizable only once” means that the effect control is performed according to the first byte and the second byte of the effect control command data, for example. That is, the INT signal is output once in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape).

  Of the effect control commands illustrated in FIG. 16A, the command 80XXH is a variable pattern for a variable display of a normal symbol in a normal game and a variable pattern in a variable display of a decorative symbol executed corresponding to the normal game. This is a general pattern variation pattern designation command for designating a diagram variation pattern. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the notification content or the specified content by the effect control command. In the common map change pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the general map change pattern to be notified. Corresponding to the general pattern variation pattern specified by the general map variation pattern designation command, the fixed normal symbol that is the result of the general map display is derived and displayed after the normal symbol variation (variable display) is started in the general diagram game. The usual map change time until will be specified.

  The command 81XXH is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a special figure fluctuation pattern that is a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special figure game. In the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the special figure fluctuation pattern to be notified. Corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern specified by the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the fixed special symbol that is the special figure display result is derived and displayed after the special symbol fluctuation (variable display) is started in the special figure game. Special map change time up to is also specified.

  The command 8BXXXH is a general diagram display result notification command for notifying a general diagram display result that is a variable display result of a normal symbol in a general game. In the common map display result notification command, different EXT data is set according to the general map display result to be notified. As an example, the command 8B00H is the first general map display result notification command indicating the determination result that the general map display result is “missing the general map”, and the command 8B01H is the general map display result “per 1st general map”. The second common map display result notification command indicating the determination result to be “3”, and the command 8B02H is the third general map display result notification indicating the determination result that the general map display result is “per second general map”. It can be a command.

  In this embodiment, the common figure variation pattern designation command and the common figure display result notification command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the normal map change pattern shown in the normal map change pattern designation command and the general map display result shown in the general map display result notification command can be specified by one production control command. May be. As an example, EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a normal map fluctuation pattern and a normal map display result (any one of “normal map loss”, “per 1st general map”, and “per 2nd general map”). An effect control command may be prepared, and information that can identify the normal map variation pattern and the normal map display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Or you may enable it to specify a usual figure change pattern and a usual figure display result by three or more production control commands. Here, when it is configured so that the normal map variation pattern and the general map display result can be specified by one production control command, a plurality of types of general map display results are obtained for one general map variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of effect control commands. On the other hand, if the effect control command for designating the normal map variation pattern and the effect control command for notifying the normal map display result are prepared separately, the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of the general map variation pattern is provided. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of the usual map display results may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a special figure display result notification command for notifying a special figure display result that is a variable display result of a special symbol in a special figure game. In the special figure display result notification command, different EXT data is set according to the special figure display result to be notified. As an example, the command 8C00H is a first special figure display result notification command indicating a determination result that the special figure display result is “big hit”. Further, the commands 8C01H to 8C07H are the second to eighth special figure display result notification commands indicating the determination result that the special figure display result is “small hit”. Here, when the special figure display result is “small hit”, the special figure display result notification is made according to whether the small hit type is “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”. The EXT data in the command may be set to any one of 01H to 07H.

  In this embodiment, a special figure variation pattern designation command and a special figure display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation pattern shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the special figure display result shown in the special figure display result notification command can be specified by one production control command. May be. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special figure variation pattern and a special figure display result (“big hit”, “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”) May be prepared, and information that can specify the special figure variation pattern and the special figure display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the special figure variation pattern and the special figure display result are configured to be specified by one production control command, a plurality of types of special figure display results are obtained for one special figure fluctuation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of effect control commands. On the other hand, if the effect control command for designating the special figure variation pattern and the effect control command for notifying the special figure display result are prepared separately, the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of the special figure variation pattern is prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of special figure display results may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a general figure determination command indicating that the variable symbol display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game is terminated and the general symbol display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed (confirmed). On the side of the effect control board 80, in response to receiving the universal figure confirmation command, control for terminating the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbol and deriving and displaying (determining) the display result (definite decorative symbol). Is done. The command 8F01H is a special figure confirmation command indicating that the special figure variable display (fluctuation) in the special figure game is terminated and the special figure display result (definite special symbol) is derived and displayed (confirmed).

  The command 90XXH indicates that a bonus entry such as a first advance entrance 71 and a second advance entrance 72 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is started when execution of a small hit game such as a start operation is started by controlling to the small hit game state. This is an accessory release command notifying that it will be released. In the bonus release command, different EXT data may be set depending on, for example, the number of continuations of the advantageous state or whether the start operation is based on the last special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. Here, the number of continuations of the advantageous state is based on the fact that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” or the V prize has occurred before the advantageous state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state ends. Further, it is the number of times that control to the big hit gaming state is performed without interruption of the advantageous state by being controlled to the big hit gaming state. In response to such an accessory release command, on the side of the effect control board 80, for example, in response to execution of a start operation for opening the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in an open state, the number of continuations of the advantageous state and V winnings must occur. For example, an effect operation corresponding to the end of the advantageous state is performed by a predetermined effect device (for example, the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, or a part thereof Everything).

  The command 9101H is a bonus closing command for notifying that the bonus entry is closed due to the end of the starting operation in the small hit gaming state. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration display command indicating display designation at the time of customer waiting demonstration in which demonstration display (demonstration screen display) is performed, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  The command A001H and the command A002H are jackpot notification commands that specify notification (a jackpot notification) that the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Of these, the command A001H is a jackpot notification command at the time of the special figure big hit corresponding to the case where the special figure big hit with the special figure display result in the special figure game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure big hit. . The command A002H is a big hit notification at the time of V winning corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the V winning after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”. It is a command. Note that the same (common) jackpot notification command may be used regardless of whether it is a special figure jackpot or a V prize.

  The command A 101H and the command A 102H are jackpot start commands for notifying the start of a big hit state in which execution of a big hit game such as a round is started by control to the big hit game state. Among these, the command A 101H is a big hit start command at the time of special figure big hit corresponding to the case where the big hit state starts based on the special figure big hit whose special figure display result in the special figure game is “big hit”. Command A102H is a big hit start command at the time of V winning corresponding to a case where the big win state starts based on the occurrence of the V winning after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”. . Note that the same (common) jackpot start command may be used regardless of whether it is a special figure jackpot or a V prize.

  The command A2XXH is a jackpot end command for notifying the end of the jackpot state in which the execution of the jackpot game in the jackpot game state ends. In the big hit end command, different EXT data may be set according to the number of times the advantageous state is continued. With such a big hit end command, on the side of the production control board 80, for example, when the big hit gaming state is finished, a predetermined production device can be made to perform a production operation for notifying the number of continuations of the advantageous state.

  Command A300H corresponds to the case where the small winning game state is ended when the V winning game state is ended without generating the V winning game after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “small winning”. It is a small hit end command that notifies the end. Note that even when a V-winning is generated and controlled to the big hit gaming state, a small hit end command may be transmitted corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state.

  The command A4XXH is a round start command for notifying the start of a round in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate 16 in the big hit gaming state. The command A5XXH is a round end command for notifying the end of the round due to the big winning opening being changed from the open state to the closed state by the opening / closing plate 16 in the big hit gaming state. In the round start command and the round end command, for example, different EXT data may be set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, for example, when a series of moving images are displayed as effect images, it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state or the big prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state. Regardless of whether or not it is a period, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time to the end time of the big hit gaming state. Along with such an effect operation, or separately from such an effect operation, for example, when displaying an effect image indicating the number of times of execution of a round, each time a grand prize opening is opened and execution of a new round is started In addition, an effect operation in which the display content or the like changes may be executed.

  The command B0XXH is an advantageous state designation command that designates the start of control that makes the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 advantageous. In the advantageous state designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the circumstances of controlling the big hit gaming state. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, the command B000H is a first advantageous state designation command indicating that the special figure display result in the special figure game in the normal state is controlled to the big hit gaming state with “big hit”. To do. In addition, the command B001H indicates that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the occurrence of the V winning in the small hit gaming state after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit” in the normal state. It is an advantageous state designation command. The command B002H is a third advantageous state designation command indicating that the special figure display result in the special figure game in the advantageous state is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. The fourth advantageous state indicating that the command B003H is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the occurrence of the V winning in the small hit gaming state after the special figure display result in the special figure game in the advantageous state becomes "small hit" It is a specified command. In this embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed in the advantageous state is varied in accordance with the circumstances in which the big hit gaming state is controlled. In such a case, on the side of the effect control board 80, the number of executions of the special game that can be executed in the advantageous state is specified according to the EXT data in the advantageous state designation command, and the specified number of executions is notified. It is possible to cause a predetermined production device to perform the production operation.

  The command B100H is a normal state designation command that designates the start of control that sets the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the normal state. The command B2XXH is an advantageous state end notification command for notifying the end of the advantageous state. In the advantageous state end notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the number of times until the advantageous state ends. With such an advantageous state end notification command, when the advantageous state ends, the production control board 80 can cause a predetermined effect device to perform an effect operation for notifying the number of times the advantageous state has been continued.

  The command E000H is a start winning detection command for notifying effective detection of a start winning ball that is a game ball that has entered (passed through) the start winning opening. Here, when a game ball that has entered (passed through) the start winning opening is detected, the special figure start condition for executing the special figure game by the special symbol display device 8 is not established first, and When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is neither the small hit gaming state nor the big hit gaming state, it may be determined that the start winning ball has been detected effectively. The command E001H is a first prize winning detection command for notifying the detection of a game ball (winning ball) that has entered the first advance entrance 71 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The command E002H is a second prize winning detection command for notifying the detection of a game ball (winning ball) that has entered the second entrance 72 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  The command E003H is a V winning detection command for notifying detection of a game ball (V winning ball) that has entered (passed through) a specific winning port 66A as a V winning port (specific region) provided in the variable winning ball device 20 It is. The command E004H detects the coincidence between the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning ball device 20 (the number of accessory entry balls) and the number of game balls (the number of discharge balls) detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. This is a discharge completion detection command for notifying that this has been done.

  The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like. 54, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 55 that provides a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56 that performs control operations according to a program, an I / O (Input / Output port) 57, and a CPU 56 Comprises a random number circuit 503 that independently updates numerical data indicating random values. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 56 executing a program read from the ROM 54. At this time, the CPU 56 reads the fixed data from the ROM 54, the CPU 56 writes the various data to the RAM 55 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 56 stores the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 55. The CPU 56 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57, and the CPU 56 goes outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 560 only needs to include the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 57 may be externally attached.

  In this way, in the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, this means that the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  In the main board 31, for example, a random number circuit 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 13 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 31, a random number value MR1 for determining the general display result, a random value MR2 for determining the special figure display result, and a random value for determining the small hit type Numerical data indicating MR3, random number value MR4 for determining reach, random number value MR5 for determining normal pattern variation pattern, and random number value MR6 for determining special pattern variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR6. The CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR6 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the normal figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the special figure display result are updated independently from the CPU 56 by the random number circuit 503, and the other random number values MR3 to MR3. The numerical data indicating MR6 may be updated by software by the CPU 56 using a random counter. Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR6 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 560, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the general map display result is determined to determine whether the general map display result is “per general map” or “permissive for general map”, and the type per general map when “per standard map” is selected. Is a random value used for determining whether to be “per 1st universal map” or “per 2nd universal map”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1500”, for example. In other words, the random value MR1 for determining the normal game display result is an opening that allows the game ball to win from the closed state in which the game ball cannot win the opening winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 61 based on the variable display result in the normal game. Used to determine whether or not to change to a state.

  The random number value MR2 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, for example, “1” to “1”. 734 ". The random number MR3 for determining the small hit type is any of a plurality of types such as “first small hit” to “seventh small hit” when the special figure display result is “small hit”. Or a random number value used for determining which of a plurality of types, such as special symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “10” as small hits symbols, is determined as a special symbol. Values in the range of “1” to “70” are taken. In this embodiment, whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined using the random number value MR2, while the small hit type and the small hit symbol are determined as the random value MR2. Is performed using a random number MR3 different from the above. On the other hand, the determination of the special figure display result and the determination of the small hit type and the small hit symbol may be performed using the same (common) random number value.

  The reach determination random value MR4 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the normal figure display result is determined to be “normal figure loss”. Yes, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “239” is taken. In this embodiment, when the universal map display result is determined to be “per common map”, regardless of whether the type per general map is “per first general map” or “per second general map”. First, it is determined that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. On the other hand, if the normal map display result is determined to be “normal map loss”, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state, or the fixed decorative pattern that is not reach will be derived. It may be displayed. Accordingly, whether or not to reach the reach state is determined on the basis of the random number value MR4 in response to the fact that the normal map display result is determined to be “normal map loss”.

  The random number value MR5 for determining the normal variation pattern is a random value used for determining which of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the normal variation pattern, for example, “1” to “300”. Takes a value in the range. The random value MR6 for determining the special figure variation pattern is a random value used for determining which of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the special figure variation pattern. For example, “1” to “100” is used. Takes a value in the range.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 13 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31, and special map variation storing a plurality of special map variation patterns. Table data constituting the pattern table is stored.

  FIG. 18 shows an example of the configuration of the general map display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 54. The general map display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 18A displays the general map display result before the fixed normal symbol that is the normal map display result is derived and displayed in the general game on the normal symbol display 10. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the start winning opening is set in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize based on the random number value MR1 for determining the normal figure display result.

  In the general chart display result determination table 130, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the general chart display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or an advantageous state. Are assigned to the “normal map display result” such as “per first map” or “per second map”, or to the “standard map display result” of “general map loss”. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or an advantageous state, and the type per base is “per 1st base”. Depending on whether there is “per second map”, the start opening time is set as the time for opening the start winning opening.

  In the setting example of the general chart display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 18A, the random number MR1 for determining the general chart display result is “1” to “20” corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state. Is “per 1st normal map” when it is any of the above, and “per 2nd normal map” when it is any of “21” to “30”. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the gaming state is in an advantageous state, when the random number value MR1 for determining the normal diagram display result is any one of “1” to “200”, “per 1st normal map”. , “201” to “300” is “per second map”. Accordingly, the probability of being “per figure” in the usual game is higher in the advantageous state than in the normal state. In the setting example shown in FIG. 18B, the opening opening time is 100 ms when the game state is “normal”, and the start opening time is 100 ms. When it is “hit”, the start opening time is 4000 ms. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in an advantageous state, the start opening time is 4000 ms regardless of whether the game is “per 1st base” or “per 2nd base”. Therefore, the time for the start winning opening to be in the open state is increased when it is in the advantageous state, compared with when it is in the normal state. These settings can increase the frequency at which the start winning port is controlled to be in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the advantageous state, compared to the normal state. In addition, when the player is in the advantageous state, the frequency at which the start winning opening is opened is increased by performing a control for shortening the usual figure variation time in the usual game compared to the normal state. Also good.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. The special figure display result determination table 131 sets the special figure display result as “big hit” to the big hit gaming state before the definite special symbol that becomes the special figure display result in the special figure game by the special symbol display 8 is derived and displayed. It is a table referred to for determining whether to control to the small hit gaming state as “small hit” based on the random value MR2 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 131, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “small hit”. In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”, the symbol number of the confirmed special symbol that becomes the special figure display result in the special figure game is any one of “1” to “10”. To be determined. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is determined as “big hit”, the symbol number of the confirmed special symbol is determined as “11”. Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”, for example, according to the determination result of the small hit type, it has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 that has been opened by the start operation in the small hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the V winning where the game ball wins the specific winning opening 66A, the number of rounds at the big hit, which is the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened, is “5”, “10”, “15 Is determined. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, the number of rounds at the big hit in the big hit gaming state controlled regardless of the presence or absence of the V prize is determined to be “15”.

  FIG. 20 shows a configuration example of the small hit type determination table 132 stored in the ROM 54. In the small hit type determination table 132 shown in FIG. 20A, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small hit types are “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”. For determining the type of small hits, such as which of a plurality of types such as “winning” or which of the plurality of types such as special symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “10” as final winning symbols is used as a finalized special symbol. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random value MR3.

  In the small hit type determination table 132, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random number MR3 for determining the small hit type is any one of a plurality of types of small hit types such as “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”. It is assigned to any one of a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “10”. The small hit type determination table 132 is a value corresponding to the determined small hit type (for example, “1” to “7”), for the setting value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. Table data (setting data) may be included. In this embodiment, when the small hit type is determined as one of “first small hit” to “third small hit”, the number of rounds at the big hit is “5”, and the small hit type is “fourth small hit”. The number of rounds at the big hit is “10” when it is determined as one of “hit” to “sixth small hit”, and the round number at the big hit is “10” when the small hit type is determined as “seventh small hit”. 15 ”.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 20B, depending on whether the small hit type is a plurality of types such as “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”, the special figure in the special figure game is used. The time T03 that is the time until the variable winning ball device 20 is opened by the starting operation after the deriving display of the confirmed special symbol that is the display result is completed, or the variable winning ball device 20 is started by the starting operation. The accessory release time and the number of times of opening are set as the time for opening. Here, the pre-opening time T03 is made different according to the symbol number of the small hit symbol derived and displayed as the special symbol display result in the special symbol game. Therefore, when the pre-opening time T03 that differs depending on the type of the small winning symbol as the result of opening display derived and displayed in the special figure game has elapsed, the execution of the starting operation is started and the variable winning ball apparatus 20 Becomes an open state. In addition, after starting operation is complete | finished and the variable prize-winning ball apparatus 20 is made into a closed state, the role release used as the waiting time for detecting the game ball (inside-item entry ball) which approached inside the variable prize-winning ball apparatus 20 is detected. The later time T21 is set to a fixed time (3000 ms in the example of FIG. 20B) regardless of whether the small hit type is a plurality of types.

  If the same (common) random number value is used to determine whether the special chart display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and to determine the small hit type or small hit symbol For example, in the special figure display result determination table 131 shown in FIG. 19, the special figure display result assigned to the “small hit” is the small hit type or symbol number in the small hit type determination table 132 as shown in FIG. The table data (determination data) may be configured so as to be allocated to the determination results.

  FIG. 21 shows a configuration example of the reach determination table 133 stored in the ROM 54. The reach determination table 133 determines whether or not to change the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state when it is determined that the normal map display result is “normal map loss”. It is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision based on In the reach determination table 133, the reach determination randomness is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or an advantageous state, the number of reserved reserved memories of the usual game, etc. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR4 is assigned to one of the reach determination results, such as the determination result of “non-reach” that does not reach the reach state and the determination result of “reach” that sets the reach state.

  In the setting example of the reach determination table 133 shown in FIG. 21, the assignment of the determination value to the reach determination result is different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state, or the number of reserved drawings stored. For example, when the usual number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “2”), more determination values are assigned to the determination result of “non-reach” than when the number is more than the predetermined number. In addition, more determined values are assigned to “non-reach” determination results in the advantageous state than in the normal state. With such a setting, when the number of ordinary reserved memory is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “2”), it is smaller than when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in an advantageous state, compared with when it is in a normal state. Thus, the proportion of the determination that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state is reduced. In addition, the average normal figure change time when the decorative symbol variable display state is not reach is set to be shorter than the average normal figure change time when the reach state is reached. Thus, when the number of stored general-purpose holds is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average time of normal map change is greater than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Can be shortened.

  22 and FIG. 23 show an example of the configuration of a common figure variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In this embodiment, as the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, the normal fluctuation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 22, the reach fluctuation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 23 (A), and FIG. 23 (B). A non-reach fluctuation pattern determination table 134C shown in FIG. 23 and a normal change return pattern determination table 134D shown in FIG. 23C are prepared in advance.

  Based on the random value MR5 for determining the normal variation pattern, the normal variation variation determination table 134A is determined based on the random value MR5 for determining the general variation pattern when a determination is made that the result of the general map display in the general game is “per general map”. It is a table referred in order to determine a figure fluctuation pattern in any one of multiple types. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination table 134A, whether the gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state, and the normal diagram display result (general map type) is “per first diagram” and “second diagram”. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the normal pattern variation pattern is determined according to whether it is “winning” or the like. It is assigned to any one of a plurality of types of ordinary fluctuation patterns, such as any one of the figure fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4.

  The reach variation pattern determination table 134B has a determination that the display result of the normal game in the normal game is “Lost”, and that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined to be in the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of a general variation pattern based on a random number MR5 for determining a general variation pattern. In the reach variation pattern determination table 134B, a numerical value (compared with the random value MR5 for determining the normal variation pattern is determined in accordance with whether the gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state, the number of reserved general memory, etc. (Determined value) is assigned to one of a plurality of types of general-purpose variation patterns, such as any one of the general-purpose variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4.

  The non-reach time variation pattern determination table 134C is used when a determination is made that the result of displaying a normal map in the normal game is “Lost”, and a variable display state of the decorative pattern is determined not to be a reach state. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of general variation patterns based on the random number MR5 for determining the general variation pattern. In the non-reach variation pattern determination table 134C, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation map for the normal map according to whether the game state is the normal state or the advantageous state, the number of the general map hold memory, etc. The (determined value) is assigned to any one of a plurality of types of ordinary map variation patterns, such as any of the ordinary diagram variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4.

  The normal pattern change return pattern determination table 134D displays the remaining normal map change as the remaining time for variably displaying the normal symbol in the general game when the special effect display ends and the normal effect display returns. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of common map variation patterns based on time. In the normal map change return pattern determination table 134D, is the normal map display result in the normal game displayed when returning to the normal performance display “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”? The table data (determination data) is configured so that the general map change pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types corresponding to the “normal map loss” or the normal map change remaining time.

  In the setting example of the normal map change return pattern determination table 134D shown in FIG. 23C, the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”. When the remaining figure fluctuation time is outside the range of 16500 ms to 35999 ms, the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA4-1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA4-3 used only when returning to the ordinary figure fluctuation according to the ordinary figure fluctuation remaining time. It is determined to be one of the usual map variation patterns PA4-5. On the other hand, when the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”, if the remaining time of the normal map fluctuation is in the range of 16500 ms to 35999 ms, the normal map return is restored. In addition to the general map variation pattern PA4-2 and the general diagram variation pattern PA4-3 that are used only at the time, the general diagram variation pattern PA3-1 and the general diagram variation pattern PA3-2 that are used at times other than the normal map variation return Either can be determined.

  Further, in the setting example shown in FIG. 23C, in response to the case where the normal map display result is “normal map loss”, when the normal map fluctuation remaining time is outside the range of 4000 ms to 30999 ms, the normal map is displayed. In accordance with the remaining fluctuation time, it is determined as one of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA4-1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA4-5 that are used only when returning to the ordinary figure fluctuation. On the other hand, when the normal map display result is “general map loss” and the normal map change remaining time is within the range of 4000 ms to 30999 ms, the normal map change pattern used other than when the normal map change is returned. It can be determined as any one of PA1-1 to ordinary fluctuation pattern PA1-4, ordinary fluctuation pattern PA2-1, and ordinary fluctuation pattern PA2-2.

  In this way, when the remaining normal map change time at the time of normal map recovery is within the specified range, it is possible to determine the normal pattern change pattern to be used at other times than normal map return. It is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity for executing the normal effect display by suppressing an increase in the dedicated customary fluctuation pattern used sometimes. In addition, when deciding to one of multiple types of general-purpose fluctuation patterns according to the remaining time of normal-map fluctuation, if there are multiple normal-pattern fluctuation patterns shorter than the remaining time of normal-picture fluctuation, Thus, it is only necessary to determine the normal map change pattern with the longest normal map change time. Alternatively, it may be determined to be a usual figure fluctuation pattern that becomes a usual figure fluctuation time closest to the usual figure fluctuation remaining time (the time difference is the smallest). In the pattern change return table determination table 134D, the map display result is “per 1st map” or “per 2nd map” and the remaining time of the map variation is in the range of 16500 ms to 35999 ms. Even when the figure display result is “general map loss” and the normal map change remaining time is within the range of 4000 ms to 30999 ms, the range of the normal map change remaining time is further subdivided, and 1 for each subdivided range. You may set so that one common figure fluctuation pattern may be matched.

  FIG. 24 shows a universal pattern variation pattern used in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, as a plurality of types of general-purpose variation patterns, general-purpose variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, general-purpose variation patterns PA2-1 to general-purpose variation patterns. PA2-4, ordinary map variation pattern PA3-1 to ordinary diagram variation pattern PA3-4, ordinary diagram variation pattern PA4-1 to ordinary diagram variation pattern PA4-5 are prepared in advance. In each normal pattern change pattern, the normal pattern change time from the start of variable display of normal symbols in the normal game until the derivation and display of the fixed normal symbol that is the result of the normal map display, and the display mode in the variable display of decorative symbols The production mode including, etc. is different.

  For example, in the normal map variation pattern PA1-1, variable display or the like is performed in a non-reach H1 effect mode at a normal time when the normal map variation time in the normal game is not shortened. In the normal variation pattern PA1-2, variable display or the like is performed in a non-reach H2 effect mode in a normal state. In the general map variation pattern PA1-3, variable display or the like is performed in a non-reach H3 effect mode when the general map variation time in the general game is shortened. In the normal map variation pattern PA1-4, variable display or the like is performed in the non-reach H4 effect mode when the normal map variation time in the general game is shortened. These normal pattern variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are included in non-reach variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to a non-reach state in which the decorative display variable display state is not the reach state.

  In the normal pattern change pattern PA2-1, after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state, a reach effect or the like is performed in an effect mode that is normal N1, and then a reach / miss combination other than the specific combination (also referred to as “reach combination”). ) A lost effect for deriving and displaying a confirmed decorative symbol is performed. In the normal pattern change pattern PA2-2, after performing the reach effect or the like in the effect mode that becomes normal N2, the loss effect that derives and displays the determined decorative symbol of the reach combination is performed. In the usual figure variation pattern PA2-3, after performing the reach effect or the like in the effect mode that becomes the super S1, the loss effect that derives and displays the determined decorative symbol of the reach combination is performed. In the usual figure variation pattern PA2-4, after performing the reach effect in the effect mode that becomes the super S2, the lose effect for deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern of the reach combination is performed. These ordinary figure variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 are included in reach variation patterns prepared in advance in correspondence with the case where the losing effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state.

  In the general pattern variation pattern PA3-1, after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state, the reach effect is performed in the effect form that is normal N1, and then the definite decorative pattern of a specific combination is derived and displayed. Done. In the normal variation pattern PA3-2, after performing a reach effect in the effect mode that is normal N2, a hit effect is performed for deriving and displaying a specific combination of definite decorative symbols. In the normal pattern variation pattern PA3-3, a reach effect for deriving and displaying a specific combination of definite decorative symbols is performed after performing a reach effect or the like in an effect mode that becomes the super S1. In the normal pattern variation pattern PA3-4, after performing a reach effect or the like in the effect mode that becomes the super S2, a hit effect that derives and displays a specific combination of definite decorative symbols is performed. These normal pattern variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 are included in the hit variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the hit effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state.

  In the normal map variation pattern PA4-1, the effect operation is performed in the effect mode that becomes the special effect C1. In the normal pattern variation pattern PA4-2, the effect operation is performed in the effect mode that becomes the special effect C2. In the fluctuation pattern PA4-3, the effect operation is performed in the effect mode that becomes the special effect C3. In the variation pattern PA4-4, the rendering operation is performed in the rendering mode that is the special rendering C4. As an effect operation that becomes the special effect C1 to the special effect C4, for example, by performing animation display of an effect image prepared in advance in the display area of the effect display device 9, it corresponds to variable display of normal symbols in the normal game. When the effect display operation is performed and the ordinary figure display result is derived and displayed, the animation display of the effect image may be interrupted and the finalized design symbol may be derived and displayed (stop display). In the normal pattern variation pattern PA4-5, the effect operation is performed in the effect mode that becomes the special effect C5. In this special effect C5, it is only necessary to perform the derivation display (stop display) of the confirmed decorative pattern without performing the animation display of the effect image. The normal map change pattern PA4-1 to the normal map change pattern PA4-5 are the normal map change patterns used only at the time of return to the normal map change when the special effect display ends and the normal effect display returns. On the other hand, the general map variation pattern PA1-1 to the general map variation pattern PA1-4, the general map variation pattern PA2-1 to the general map variation pattern PA2-4, the general map variation pattern PA3-1 to the general map variation pattern PA3. -4 is a general map fluctuation pattern that is used except when returning to the normal map fluctuation. Then, for example, according to the setting of the pattern change table 134D at the time of return to normal change as shown in FIG. 23C, the normal change pattern PA1-1 to the normal change pattern PA1-4, the normal change pattern PA2-1, The general map variation pattern PA2-2, the general map variation pattern PA3-1, and the general map variation pattern PA3-2 are the common map variation patterns that are also used when returning to the normal map variation.

  In the setting example of the normal pattern per hour fluctuation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 22, when the game state is the normal state, the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure”. A determined value is assigned so as to be determined as any one of the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state and the base map display result is “per 1st base map”, the losing effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. A definite decorative symbol of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 18 (B), when the game diagram is in the normal state and the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map”, the start opening time is shortened to 100 ms. It becomes difficult to allow the game ball to enter the start winning opening. Therefore, in this case, even when the fixed normal symbol that is the normal map display result is derived and displayed in the general map game, the notification that the general map display result is “per normal map” is not performed. It may be.

  On the other hand, in the setting example of the per-game fluctuation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 22, when the game state is the normal state, the base game display result is “per second base game”, or the game state In response to the fact that the base map display result is “per 1st base map” or “per 2nd base map” when is in an advantageous state, the general map change pattern PA3-1 to the general map change pattern PA3-4. A decision value is assigned so as to be determined as one of the following. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, the base map display result is “per second base map”, or when the game state is the advantageous state, the base map display result is “per first base map” or In the case of “per second common figure”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the hit effect is performed and the definite decorative symbol of the specific combination is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 18 (B), when the game state is the normal state, the normal diagram display result is “per second map”, or when the game state is the advantageous state, When the result is “per 1st base figure” or “per 2nd base figure”, the start opening time is as long as 4000 ms, so that the game ball can easily enter the start winning opening. Therefore, in this case, when the fixed normal symbol that is the normal map display result is derived and displayed in the general map game, a notification that the general map display result is “per normal map” is made. do it. When the gaming state is in an advantageous state, the normal figure change time when the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure” or “per 2nd normal figure” is made shorter than in the normal state. May be. At this time, for example, the start winning opening is opened by displaying an effect image indicating a message such as “Aim for the left” in the display area of the effect display device 9 without performing variable display of the decorative symbols. May be displayed, a display for prompting the game ball to enter the start winning opening, or the like.

  In the setting example of the reach variation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 23A, the determined value for the general pattern variation pattern depends on whether the game state is the normal state or the advantageous state, and the number of the general map hold memory. The assignment of is different. For example, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than a predetermined number (for example, “2”), a larger number of determination values are assigned to general-purpose variation patterns other than the general-purpose variation pattern PA2-1 as compared with the case where the number is larger than the predetermined number. It has been. In the normal state, more decision values are assigned to the normal variation patterns other than the normal variation pattern PA2-1 as compared with the advantageous state. With such a setting, when the number of ordinary reserved memory is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “2”), it is smaller than when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in an advantageous state, compared with when it is in a normal state. Thus, the ratio determined to the normal map variation pattern PA2-1 increases. Then, as shown in FIG. 24, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal time fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is 19000 ms, and the normal time fluctuation pattern PA2-2 is a reach fluctuation pattern other than the normal time fluctuation pattern PA2-1. The fluctuation pattern PA2-4 is set to be shorter than the usual figure fluctuation time. Therefore, when the number of reserved maps is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average time of normal map change is larger than when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in an advantageous state, compared to when it is in the normal state. It can be shortened.

  Even in the setting example of the non-reach variation pattern determination table 134C shown in FIG. 23B, the determination for the general pattern variation pattern is made according to whether the gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state, and the number of the general-purpose reserved memory. The value assignment is different. For example, in the normal state, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), more determined values are assigned to the generalized pattern variation pattern PA1-1 than when the number is larger than the predetermined number. . In addition, when the number of reserved maps in the normal state is less than “3”, a decision value is not assigned to the variation map PA1-4 in the normal state, while the number of stored maps in the normal state is “3” or more. In this case, a decision value is assigned to the general map variation pattern PA1-4. Further, when the number of reserved maps in the normal state is less than “4”, a decision value is assigned to the variation map PA1-2, while the number of stored maps in the normal state is “4”. In some cases, a decision value is not assigned to the general map variation pattern PA1-2. In the advantageous state, the decision value is not assigned to the general map variation pattern PA1-1 and the general map variation pattern PA1-2, while the general map variation pattern PA1-3 and the general map variation pattern PA1-4 are not assigned. The decision value is assigned. In addition, when the number of reserved maps is less than “2” in the advantageous state, more decision values are assigned to the maps fluctuation pattern PA1-4 than when the stored number is “2” or more. Then, as shown in FIG. 24, the normal map change time in the normal map change pattern PA1-3 among the normal map change patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 as non-reach change patterns is 4000 ms, which is the shortest. Yes, the normal time fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (8500ms), the normal time fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (13000ms), and the normal time fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (17500ms) are set so as to increase in order. Therefore, when the number of reserved maps is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average time of normal map change is larger than when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in an advantageous state, compared to when it is in the normal state. It can be shortened.

  In the normal figure change return pattern determination table 134D, when the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure”, it is determined according to whether the gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state. The table data may be configured so that the usual pattern variation pattern is different. For example, if the map display result is “per 1st map” and the gaming state is normal, the map change pattern is based on the same setting as when the map display result is “map loss”. May be determined. On the other hand, if the game display state is advantageous when the map display result is “per 1st map”, the same setting as when the map display result is “per 2nd map” is used. It is only necessary to determine an ordinary map variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 18 (B), when the game diagram is in the normal state and the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map”, the start opening time is shortened to 100 ms. It becomes difficult to allow the game ball to enter the start winning opening. Therefore, in this case, the normal map variation pattern may be determined based on the same setting as that in the case where the normal map display result is “normal map loss”.

  FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of the special figure variation pattern determination table 135 stored in the ROM 54. The special figure variation pattern determination table 135 shown in FIG. 25A corresponds to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special figure game is executed, based on the random number value MR6 for special figure variation pattern determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 135, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined according to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit” such as “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR6 for use is a special figure fluctuation pattern PB1-1 or a special figure fluctuation pattern PB2-1 to a special figure fluctuation pattern PB2-8. Assigned to one of the figure variation patterns.

  FIG. 25B shows a special figure fluctuation pattern used in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 25B, in this embodiment, as a plurality of types of special figure fluctuation patterns, special figure fluctuation patterns PB1-1 and special figure fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-8 are shown. Are prepared in advance. Each special figure variation pattern corresponds to the special figure variation time from the start of variable display of special symbols in the special game until the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of special figure display, and the variable display of special symbols. It suffices if the performance operation mode to be executed is different. In addition, about the effect operation | movement by displaying an effect image in the display area of the effect display apparatus 9, it is good also as the same effect operation | movement aspect irrespective of a multiple types of special figure fluctuation pattern. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the variable winning ball device 20 is opened by the starting operation in the small hit gaming state from being recognized.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B show a configuration example of a start winning release operation control pattern stored in the ROM 54. The start winning release operation control pattern is a control pattern for performing control to change the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 from the closed state to the open state. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of start prize release operation control patterns, a start prize release operation control pattern CSA shown in FIG. 26A and a start prize release operation control pattern CSB shown in FIG. Prepared in advance.

  Each start winning release operation control pattern CSA, CSB includes data indicating the movable portion opening control time as the time during which the opening / closing control of the start winning opening is performed, and the state of the drive signal transmitted to the movable portion solenoid 62 (ON / OFF). OFF part) movable part solenoid output data, and data indicating the start opening time or end code, which is the time for opening the start winning opening, are included. Here, the movable part opening control time, the start port opening time, and the like may be measured using a timer updated every 2 ms. Here, 2 ms is a timer interrupt generation period in the game control microcomputer 560. In the interrupt process (for example, the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36) executed by the CPU 56 in response to the timer interrupt, the movable part is opened. The stored value (timer value) of the timer that measures the control time, the start opening time, etc. may be updated. Therefore, in each start winning release operation control pattern CSA, CSB, various data may be set in hexadecimal so that 2 ms × (data value) is the actual control time. Note that the data indicating the movable part opening control time, the movable part solenoid output data, and the like are specified by separate pattern tables, and in the pattern table including the data indicating the movable part opening control time, the movable part solenoid output data Or the like (a storage position in the ROM 54) of a pattern table including the above may be designated.

  The start winning opening operation control pattern CSA is based on the fact that the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure” in the normal state, and the start winning opening provided in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is extended for 100 ms. It is the control pattern which makes it an open state once. In the start winning release operation control pattern CSA, following the data indicating the movable portion release control time, the movable portion solenoid output data indicating the value “01” for turning on the movable portion solenoid 62 and the start opening time are set. Data indicating 100 ms, solenoid output data indicating a value of “00” for turning off the movable part solenoid 62, and an end code are sequentially set.

  The start winning and releasing operation control pattern CSB indicates that the normal map display result is “per second map” when in the normal state, and the normal map display result is “per first map” when in the advantageous state. ”Or“ per second map ”is a control pattern in which the start winning opening provided in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened once for 4000 ms. In the start winning release operation control pattern CSB, following the data indicating the movable portion release control time, the movable portion solenoid output data indicating the value of “01” for turning on the movable portion solenoid 62 and the start opening time are set. Data indicating 4000 ms, solenoid output data indicating a value of “00” for turning off the movable portion solenoid 62, and an end code are sequentially set.

  In order to open the start winning opening with the opening opening time corresponding to the gaming state and the type per game as shown in FIG. 18B, for example, a start opening pattern as shown in FIG. The setting table 136 may be stored in the ROM 54. In the start opening pattern setting table 136, whether the game state is a normal state or an advantageous state, and the normal map display result (type per normal map) is “per 1st normal map” and “per 2nd normal map”. Depending on which one of them is selected, one of the start winning release operation control patterns CSA and CSB is set to be a use table.

  FIG. 27 shows a configuration example of the pre-opening time setting table 137 stored in the ROM 54. When the special figure display result in the special figure game is “small hit”, the variable pre-opening time setting table 137 is set by the starting operation after the special figure display result is derived and displayed. Is a table that is referred to in order to set the time T03 before opening of an accessory until it becomes an open state at different times according to the symbol number of the special symbol that is the small symbol that is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. . That is, in the pre-opening time setting table 137, the pre-opening time T03 depends on whether the symbol number of the small hit symbol derived and displayed in the special game is “1” to “10”. Is set to be different. Accordingly, when the small hit symbol that is the result of the opening display is derived and displayed in the special figure game, the pre-opening time T03 is made different depending on the type of the small hit symbol that is derived and displayed. After T03 elapses, the starting operation for changing the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the open state can be started.

  28 and 29 show a configuration example of the accessory release operation control pattern stored in the ROM 54. The accessory release operation control pattern changes the accessory entrances such as the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 20 into a closed state and an open state by a start operation in the small hit gaming state. This is a control pattern for performing control. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of accessory release operation control patterns, the accessory release operation control pattern CYA to the accessory release operation control pattern CYD shown in FIGS. 28 (A) to (D), and FIG. 29 (A). And the accessory release operation control pattern CYE and the accessory release operation control pattern CYF shown in (B) are prepared in advance.

  In each of the accessory release operation control pattern CYA to the accessory release operation control pattern CYF, data indicating the accessory release control time as the time during which opening / closing control of the accessory entry is performed, and the drive to be transmitted to the release solenoid 75 are performed. Open solenoid output data indicating the signal state (ON / OFF), and an accessory opening time as a time for opening the accessory entrance, or an accessory closing time as an interval when changing to an open state multiple times Alternatively, data indicating an end code is included. Here, the accessory release control time, the accessory release time, the accessory closing time, and the like may be measured using a timer updated every 2 ms. Accordingly, in each of the accessory release operation control pattern CYA to the accessory release operation control pattern CYF, various data may be set in hexadecimal so that 2 ms × (data value) is the actual control time. Note that the data indicating the accessory release control time and the release solenoid output data are specified by separate pattern tables, and in the pattern table including the data indicating the accessory release control time, the release solenoid output data and the like are included. The address of the included pattern table (storage position in the ROM 54) may be designated.

  In order to open the accessory entry with the opening time and the number of releases according to the small hit type as shown in FIG. 20B, for example, the accessory release pattern as shown in FIG. The setting table 138 may be stored in the ROM 54. In the accessory release pattern setting table 138, the accessory release operation control pattern CYA to the accessory release operation is selected according to which of the plurality of types such as “first bonus hit” to “seventh bonus hit”. One of the control patterns CYF is set to be a use table.

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 13 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 55 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 30, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 30 includes a general figure hold storage unit 151, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit. 155.

  The general symbol holding storage unit 151 is a general symbol game in which a normal ball start condition is satisfied but a general symbol start condition is not satisfied because a game ball passes through the gate 32 (variable display of a normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10). Stores pending data. As an example, the universal map storage unit 151 associates with the reservation numbers in the order of passage of the gate 32 and determines the general map display result extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the general chart start condition by the passage. Is stored as pending data, and the stored number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 includes, for example, a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a universal hit flag, an advantageous state flag, an advantageous state end flag, a big hit advantageous flag, a first A storage part release flag, a second storage part release flag, a V winning flag, a movable member operating flag, a movable member operation completion flag, a movable member initial position setting request flag, an initial position controlling flag, and the like are provided. In addition, the game control flag setting unit 152 may store data indicating the states of various flags used for controlling the progress of the game.

  The special symbol process flag indicates which process in step S15 shown in FIG. 36 or the special symbol process shown in FIG. 37 executed to control the progress of the special symbol game using the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. Indicates whether or not to be selected and executed. The ordinary symbol process flag is used in step S16 shown in FIG. 36 or ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 52, which is executed to control the progression of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 10. Indicates whether or not to be selected and executed.

  The big hit flag has entered the inside of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 that has been determined to be a special jackpot display result when the special figure game is started, or has been opened by the starting operation. The game ball is set to the on state based on winning (V winning) in the specific winning opening 66A. On the other hand, in response to the fact that the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state has reached the number of rounds in the big hit hour, the big hit flag is cleared and the game is turned off. The common figure flag is set to the on state in response to the decision that the common figure display result is “per common figure” when the usual figure game is started. On the other hand, as a variable display result in the normal game, the normal symbol indicator 10 clears the normal symbol flag and turns it off in response to the display corresponding to “per symbol” being performed. .

  The advantageous state flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the advantageous state, while being in an off state in response to the end of the advantageous state. The advantageous state end flag is set to the on state in response to the determination that the advantageous state is to be ended based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the advantageous state, while the advantageous state ends. Turns off. The big hit advantageous flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state being in the advantageous state during execution of the special figure game that has been controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, the big hit advantageous flag is cleared and the state is turned off.

  The first storage unit release flag indicates that the first storage unit that temporarily stores (stops) the game ball guided from the route member 92 included in the first route 900A inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state (stop release). In response to being controlled by (state), it is set to the on state. On the other hand, in response to the first reservoir being controlled from the open state to the closed state (stopped state), the first reservoir release flag is cleared and turned off. The second storage unit release flag indicates that the second storage unit that temporarily stores (stops) the game ball guided from the route member 94 included in the second route 900B inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state (stop release). In response to being controlled by (state), it is set to the on state. On the other hand, in response to the second storage unit being controlled from the open state to the closed state (stopped state), the second storage unit release flag is cleared and is turned off. The V winning flag is set to the on state in response to the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 opened by the start operation winning a specific winning opening 66A (V winning). On the other hand, the V winning flag is cleared and turned off when the big hit gaming state ends after the small hit gaming state is controlled from the small winning gaming state based on the V winning.

  The movable member operating flag moves the nut-like member 77C connected to the movable member 77 downward from above by driving a movable member drive motor 77B provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a small hit game state or the like. Corresponding to moving to the ON state is set. On the other hand, the movable member operating flag is cleared and turned off when the arrangement of the movable member 77 is changed downward and the movable member 77 is detected by the lower position sensor 91b. The movable member operation completion flag and the movable member initial position setting request flag are set to an on state in response to the detection of the movable member 77 by the lower position sensor 91b. The movable member initial position setting request flag is cleared and turned off when the nut-shaped member 77C connected to the movable member 77 is moved from below to above by driving the movable member drive motor 77B. The initial position control in-progress flag is set to an on state in response to moving the nut-like member 77C connected to the movable member 77 from below to above by driving the movable member drive motor 77B. On the other hand, the flag during initial position control is cleared and turned off when the movable member 77 is returned to the upper position and the movable member 77 is detected by the upper position sensor 91a.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, a start operation control timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As an example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the jackpot gaming state, and is used as a down counter that periodically counts down It is done. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically. More specifically, before the round is started in the big hit gaming state, a timer initial value corresponding to the round start waiting time, which is a waiting time between each round, is set in the game control process timer, and periodically Countdown starts. Then, when the round start waiting time elapses, one round is started by controlling the opening / closing plate 16 to open the grand prize opening. At this time, a timer initial value corresponding to the maximum opening time of the big prize opening in each round is set in the game control process timer, and periodic countdown is started. After that, when the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has passed before the number of game balls won at the big winning opening reaches a predetermined maximum winning number (for example, “9”), the opening / closing plate 16 causes the large winning opening. One round is completed by performing control to set the closed state.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The start operation control timer advances the start operation for changing the accessory entry (first entrance 71 and second entrance 72) included in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 between the open state and the closed state in the small winning game state. It is for measuring the time for controlling. As a specific example, the start operation control timer is based on the fact that the small hit symbol that is the open display result is derived and displayed as the special figure display result in the special figure game, and the derivation display is completed and the small hit game state is reached. Data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the control is stored and used as an up-counter that periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a general-purpose holding memory counter, an advantageous state counter, a continuous advantageous counter, a big prize opening release counter, an in-game game ball counter, a winning number counter, etc. It has been.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 stores all or part of numerical data indicating a random number value as a game random number used for controlling the progress of the game separately from the random number circuit 503 or The CPU 56 uses the numerical data extracted from the circuit 503 to count so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, some or all of the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR6 is stored as a random count value, which is periodically or indefinite depending on the execution of software by the CPU 56. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically. The software executed by the CPU 56 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 503, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 503. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or calculation (addition / subtraction / multiplication / division) processing on the numerical data.

  The general-purpose reserved storage counter is for counting the number of general-purpose reserved memory, which is the number of reserved data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151. For example, in the general-purpose reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the general-purpose reserved memory number is stored as a general-purpose reserved memory number count value, and updated according to the increase or decrease of the general-purpose reserved memory number (for example, 1 Addition or 1 subtraction).

  The advantageous state counter is used to count the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed until the advantageous state is ended when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the advantageous state. As an example, in the advantageous state counter, when the big hit gaming state ends, data indicating a count initial value corresponding to the circumstances controlled to the big hit gaming state is set as the advantageous state count value. After that, until the next big hit game state is controlled, every time the special figure game ends, the advantageous state count value is subtracted by 1 or the like and updated. When the advantageous state count value reaches “0”, setting for ending the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state is performed by setting an advantageous state end flag to an ON state.

  The continuous advantageous counter is controlled to the big hit gaming state without interruption, because the continuous advantageous counter is further controlled to the big hit gaming state before the advantageous state controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. This is for counting the number of times that the advantageous state is continued (number of times of continuous control). For example, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the normal state, or when the V winning is generated in the small hit gaming state after the special figure display result becomes “small hit” in the normal state. At the end of the big hit gaming state in which the round is executed, data indicating “1” as the initial count value is set as the continuous advantageous count value. And, if the special figure display result is “big hit” in the advantageous state, or if the V prize is generated in the small hit gaming state after the special figure display result becomes “small hit” in the advantageous state The continuous advantageous count value is updated so that 1 is added at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  The big prize opening number counter is used to count the number of remaining rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state. As an example, data indicating the initial count value corresponding to the special figure display result is set in the special winning opening opening number counter as the special winning opening opening count value when the big hit gaming state is started. After that, every time one round is completed in the big hit gaming state, the winning prize opening opening count value is decremented by 1, for example. Then, when the big winning opening opening count value reaches “0”, control for ending the big hit gaming state is performed.

  The in-game game ball counter is for counting the number of game balls remaining in the variable winning ball apparatus 20. For example, in the bonus game ball counter, data that is incremented by 1 each time a game ball is detected by the first bonus game winning switch 71a or the second bonus game winning switch 72a is used as the bonus ball count value in the bonus game. Set. Each time the game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a, the bonus ball count value in the accessory is updated so that 1 is subtracted. The winning number counter is for counting the number of game balls won in the large winning opening opened by the opening / closing plate 16. For example, data that is incremented by one every time a game ball is detected by the count switch 23 is set in the winning number counter as a winning number count value. Then, when the winning number count value becomes a value corresponding to a predetermined maximum winning number (for example, “9”), one round is completed. When each round is started in the big hit gaming state, the winning number counter is cleared and the winning number count value is initialized to “0”.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a small hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer is configured to include a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 54 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The small hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result as to which of the plural types of the small hit types when the special figure display result is “small hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the small hit type determination table 132 as shown in FIG. 20A, depending on whether the small hit type is determined from “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”. Any one of “1” to “7” is set as the small hit type buffer value.

  The I / O 57 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 13 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. And an output port for transmission.

  For example, an effect control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14 is mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 receives an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 177, and performs display control in the effect display device 9 that variably displays decorative symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 performs lighting control of the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c, and lighting control of other decorative light emitting members via the lamp driver board 35. Audio output control at the speaker 27 is performed via the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 177, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to include a production control CPU 101, a RAM that stores information related to the production, and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. The RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 may not be backed up by the power source. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown) built in the effect control microcomputer 100, and is input via the relay board 177. In response to the capture signal (effect control INT signal) from 31, the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103a. Hereinafter, the ROM built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is also referred to as effect control ROM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for temporarily storing (developing) image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 120 is connected to the input port 103 b mounted on the effect control board 80. The operation detection signal input to the input port 103b is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the operation detection signal from the operation button 120, for example, a process for effecting a game effect such as a notice effect is executed.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 177 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). Any unidirectional circuit may be used as the restricting means. An effect control command or the like input to the input driver 102 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 103a.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the first reservoir decoration unit solenoid 90d, the decoration member drive motor 78B, and the sword drive motor 79 via the output port 104. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the decorative light emitting member to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. In addition, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the decorative light emitting member is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 supplies current to decorative light emitting members such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c based on a signal for driving the decorative light emitting member.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The audio data ROM 704 stores audio data corresponding to the sound number data. The sound data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period). The voice synthesizing IC 703 reads voice data for generating sound and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores (decompresses) the voice data in a predetermined voice RAM or the like, and then corresponds to the voice data. The generated audio signal (analog audio signal) is output to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27.

  In the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the production operation is updated by a built-in or external random number circuit (not shown). Count as possible. FIG. 31 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 31, in this embodiment, numerical data indicating each of the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols is counted on the side of the effect control board 80. Control possible. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. The random number circuit built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 may be anything that counts numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the number may be counted. Alternatively, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit built in or attached to the production control microcomputer 100, all of the random number values are obtained. Alternatively, numerical data indicating a part may be updated. Further, if the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 may use a random counter to count numerical data indicating all random number values.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are variable display results of ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”Is a random value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed on each of the variable display portions 9L, 9C, 9R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed on the variable display portions 9L and 9C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. A decorative pattern. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “70”.

  In addition to the effect control program, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the effect control ROM built in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, the effect control ROM stores a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the control pattern table, and the like. .

  For example, in the effect control ROM, the same symbol determination table 140A as shown in FIG. 32A and the symbol difference determination table 140B as shown in FIG. 32B are stored in advance. The same symbol determination table 140A includes a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed on the variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the fixed decorative symbols are in a specific combination. In order to determine a fixed decorative pattern that is the same in the variable display result of the decorative symbol, such as a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed by the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R when the symbol is a reach combination. It is a table. The symbol difference determination table 140B includes the decorative symbols derived and displayed on the “middle” variable display portion 9C and the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R when the determined decorative symbol is a reach combination. It is a table for determining the difference (design difference) with the decorative design derived and displayed.

  In the same symbol determination table 140A, “Left” and “Right” variable display sections 9L and 9R are all derived in accordance with the universal variation pattern specified by the universal variation pattern designation command. The symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the symbol for the reach combination to be displayed, and in the case of a specific combination, it is derived and displayed on the variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the symbol for the specific combination.

  In the setting example of the same symbol determination table 140A shown in FIG. 32 (A), the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state by the variation pattern PA2-1 to variation pattern PA2-4 and variation pattern PA3-1 to variation pattern PA3-4. In accordance with the reach effect mode (see FIG. 24), the assignment of the decision value to the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the symbol for the reach combination or the symbol for the specific combination is different. For example, in the normal pattern variation pattern PA2-1 or the normal diagram variation pattern PA3-1 in which the reach effect is executed in the normal N1 effect mode, the symbol number is an even number as compared with the other normal pattern variation patterns. Many decision values are assigned to the decorative symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. When it is the general map variation pattern PA2-2 or the general diagram variation pattern PA3-2 in which the reach effect is executed in the normal N2 rendering mode, when it is the general diagram variation pattern PA2-1 or the general diagram variation pattern PA3-1 In comparison, a large number of decision values are assigned to decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”. In the case of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA3-3 in which the reach effect is executed in the production mode of the super S1, when it is the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA2-2 or the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA3-2 In comparison, a large number of decision values are assigned to decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”. Furthermore, the symbol number is an odd number in the normal pattern variation pattern PA2-4 or the normal diagram variation pattern PA3-4 in which the reach effect is executed in the super S2 effect mode, as compared to the case of the other normal pattern variation pattern. Many decision values are assigned to the decorative symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”.

  Reach effect was executed in the super S2 effect mode by assigning the determined value in the per-normal change pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 22 or the reach change pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. Occasionally, there is a high possibility that the result of the normal map display will be “per normal map” (reliability), and the normal per-type type will be “per second general map”. The reliability is set to decrease in the order of N2 and normal N1. Therefore, according to the reliability of the reach effect, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the reach state. In other words, according to the types of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the reach state, the expectation that a highly reliable reach production will be executed, the expectation that the normal map display result will be `` per normal map '', etc. Can be different.

  In the case of the reach combination, the fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “middle” variable display portion 9C is the decorative decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R. It is specified by the symbol difference which is the difference value with the number. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in all the variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ In the case of deriving and displaying a fixed decorative pattern that is a result of variable display of decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “variable” display portion 9C for “decorative” that is finally displayed as a decorative symbol. After the reach combination symbols derived and displayed on the variable display portions 9L and 9R are determined using the same symbol determination table 140A, they are derived and displayed on the “medium” variable display portion 9C using the symbol difference determination table 140B. The difference (design difference) between the determined decorative design and the reach combination design is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, the fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “medium” variable display portion 9C is determined. In the symbol difference determination table 140B, all or one of the symbol differences “−3”, “−2”, “−1”, and “+1” corresponding to the usual symbol variation pattern designated by the ordinary symbol variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is assigned to the part. In the case of a reach combination, a determined decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R is determined using a reach symbol determination table different from the same symbol determination table 140A. May be. In this case, in the reach symbol determination table, it is only necessary to set the allocation of the determination value to the symbol number of the decorative symbol as the reach combination symbol different from the allocation in the same symbol determination table 140A. For example, in the reach symbol determination table, as compared with the same symbol determination table 140A, it is only necessary to assign more determined values to the decorative symbol having an even symbol number.

  In the effect control ROM, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. For example, this effect control pattern table includes an ordinary control change effect control pattern table, a special view change effect control pattern table, and various effect control pattern tables.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), in the normal pattern change effect control pattern table, the final stop pattern is displayed after the change is started in the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of normal pattern change patterns. Data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as variable display operation of decoration symbols and effect display operation of reach effect during the period until the confirmed decorative symbol that is It is only necessary to store a plurality of types.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the special-figure production effect control pattern table corresponds to a plurality of types of special-figure fluctuation patterns, etc. Data indicating the control content of various effects operations such as effect display operation by static display or animation display of the effect image during the period until the definite special symbol that is the figure display result is derived and displayed It is only necessary to store a plurality of types as patterns.

  In the various effect control pattern tables, data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations such as effect display operation by static display of an effect image or animation display in a period controlled by a small hit game state or a big hit game state, A plurality of types of effect control patterns may be stored. The effect control pattern table may be an address management table that manages the storage addresses of pattern data constituting a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In this case, in the effect control ROM, table data constituting the effect control pattern table is stored in a predetermined storage area, and pattern data constituting each effect control pattern is stored in an area different from this storage area. Just do it.

  FIG. 34A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Production control pattern at the time of fluctuation in the normal map stored in the production control pattern table at the time of fluctuation in the special map, production control pattern at the time of special map fluctuation stored in the production control pattern table at the time of special figure fluctuation, stored in various production control pattern tables Each effect control pattern, such as various effect control patterns, controls various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination values, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end codes. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, effects control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the operation execution time (effect time) is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 31, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 100. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 such as data indicating the change mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 27, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect or the like that is interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 27. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the decorative light emitting member such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the decorative light emitting member. In the operation detection control data, for example, an operation operation period using the operation button 120 such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation button 120, data for designating the control content of the effect operation when it is detected effectively, and the like. Is included.

  FIG. 34B is a diagram for describing various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. In the production control microcomputer 100, the production control CPU 101 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images in the display area of the effect display device 9. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 27 in a manner specified by the sound control data, and light emitting members (top frame lamp 28a, left frame lamp 28b, right frame lamp 28c, etc.) are specified in the manner specified by the lamp control data. ) Is blinked, and an operation for the operation button 120 is received and an effect content is determined in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The production control CPU 101 in the production control microcomputer 100 generates various production control patterns based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated in the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. set. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the effect control ROM and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address of the pattern data constituting the effect control ROM in a predetermined area of the RAM and designate the reading position of the stored data in the effect control ROM. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, ceiling frame lamp 28a, etc.) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Control of the light-emitting member). In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and designate execution of rendering control. Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, and the like. In the VDP 109 that has received a command from the effect control microcomputer 100, the image data indicated by the command is read from the CGROM and temporarily stored in the VRAM. In the audio output board 70 that has received a command from the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the voice synthesis IC 703 reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. Expand.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 35 is provided in the RAM incorporated in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. It has been. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 35 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, on the side of the production control board 80, separately from the side of the main board 31, the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed before the advantageous state ends may be counted. In this case, a counter similar to the advantageous state counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, when an advantageous state designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, an advantageous state is set according to the circumstances controlled to the big hit gaming state by setting a count initial value previously associated with the EXT data. The upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the above is set so as to be specified. Thereafter, the count value is set to 1 each time the start of the special figure game is detected based on reception of the special figure variation pattern designation command or the like until the big hit gaming state is controlled or the count value becomes “0”. What is necessary is just to update so that it may subtract. Further, on the side of the effect control board 80, the number of continuations of the advantageous state may be counted separately from the side of the main board 31. In this case, for example, the EXT data of the big hit end command may be made different depending on whether or not the big hit advantage flag is on. When the jackpot end command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, if the EXT data indicates that the jackpot advantage flag is off, the count value may be set to “1”. On the other hand, if the EXT data of the big hit end command indicates that the big hit advantage flag is on, the count value should be updated by one. Alternatively, on the side of the effect control board 80, the gaming state designated by the advantageous state designation command or the normal state designation command is stored, and the gaming state before the big hit gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state. Accordingly, the number of continuations of the advantageous state may be counted. In this way, in the case where the number of continuations of the advantageous state is counted on the side of the effect control board 80, the number of continuations of the advantageous state may be counted also on the main board 31 side using a continuous advantageous counter or the like. However, the number of continuations of the advantageous state may not be counted on the main substrate 31 side. However, in the case where an upper limit is set for the number of continuations of the advantageous state (so-called “number of consecutive chunks”), it is desirable to count the number of continuations of the advantageous state also on the main board 31 side.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 31, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 560 is activated, and the CPU 56 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 56 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 55 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 56 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 56 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 56 having executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is started, the CPU 56 first executes a predetermined power-off process (step S11). In this power-off process, a signal state in a predetermined power confirmation signal is checked. The power confirmation signal is output as a signal indicating whether or not a decrease in power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is detected, for example, from a voltage decrease monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board. If it is determined that a power interruption has occurred due to a drop in the power supply voltage, data necessary for backup is stored in the backup area of the RAM 55, and then the checksum buffer is set or the access to the RAM 55 is prohibited. Predetermined settings and processing such as monitoring of the power confirmation signal are executed.

  By executing a switch process subsequent to the power-off process, the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 60, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, the specific area switch 66a, the winning combination discharging switch 85a, Various switches such as a prize opening switch 33a, 38a, 39a, a count switch 23, an upper position sensor 91a, a lower position sensor 91b, a rotating body first position sensor 87a, a rotating body second position sensor 87b, and a first storage unit position sensor 90c. The state of the detection signal input from the sensor through the input driver circuit 58 is determined (step S12). After executing the switch process, the display control process is executed (step S13). In the display control process, a drive signal for performing display control in the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the status indicator lamp 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is output to each display. Subsequent to the display control process, a game random number update process is executed (step S14). In the game random number update process, the CPU 56 updates all or part of numerical data indicating various random number values to be game random numbers by software.

  Following the game random number update process, a special symbol process process is executed (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the value of the special figure process flag is Various settings for variably displaying special symbols in a special symbol game by the special symbol display 8, and opening / closing operation of the winning opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and opening / closing operation of the big winning opening by the opening / closing plate 16. Various settings are made. After executing the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). In the normal symbol process, the value of the general diagram process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and in accordance with the value of the general diagram process flag, Various settings for performing variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game by the normal symbol display 10 and various settings for controlling the opening / closing operation of the start winning opening in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 are performed.

  Following the normal symbol process, a command control process is executed (step S17). In the command control process, for example, various control commands such as an effect control command are transmitted from the main board 31 on the main side to various control boards (such as the effect control board 80) on the sub side. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 57 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 80, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table.

  After executing the command control process, an information output process is executed (step S18). In the information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, and advantageous state information supplied to the hall management computer is created and set for output from the main board 31 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Done. Following the information output process, a prize ball process is executed (step S19). In the prize ball processing, the payout control board is based on the detection signals transmitted from the start switch 60, the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a, the prize opening switches 33a, 38a, 39a, the count switch 23, and the like. 37 is set to transmit a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls according to the detection of a winning game ball.

  After the winning ball process is executed, a solenoid output process is executed (step S20). In the solenoid output process, a drive signal is used to drive or stop various solenoids such as the movable part solenoid 62, the solenoid 21 for the opening / closing plate 16, the open solenoid 75, the first storage part solenoid 90a, and the second storage part solenoid 90b. Output control is performed. Following the solenoid output process, the movable member initial position control process is executed (step S21). In the movable member initial position control process, control for setting the position of the movable member 77 to the initial position is performed.

  After the movable member initial position control process is executed, a special symbol display control process is executed (step S22). In the special symbol display control process, the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display 8 is stored in, for example, an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data included in the game control buffer setting unit 155. Processing to set is performed. In response to the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in the display control processing in step S13, whereby the special symbol variable display by the special symbol display 8 is executed. Following the special symbol display control process, a normal symbol display control process is executed (step S23). In the normal symbol display control process, the normal symbol display control data for performing variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10 is stored in an output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data included in the game control buffer setting unit 155, for example. Processing to set is performed. In accordance with the normal symbol display control data set in the output buffer, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in the display control process of step S13, whereby the normal symbol display 10 performs variable display of the normal symbol. After executing the normal symbol display control process, the game control timer interrupt process may be terminated after setting the interrupt permitted state.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 of FIG. 36 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 56 selects and executes one of the following processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example. .

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the special symbol display 8 uses a special symbol indicator 8 depending on whether or not a game ball that has entered (passed) the starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 61 is detected by the starting port switch 60. It is determined whether or not to execute a special game using symbols. In the special symbol normal process, the special symbol display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol game, is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the special symbol display result. For example, determination as to whether or not a “small hit” is made, and determination as to which of a plurality of types of small hit types in the case of “small hit” is performed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) in the special symbol game by the special symbol display 8 is set corresponding to the special symbol display result in the special symbol game.

  The special figure variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This special figure variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a special figure variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a special figure display result or the like. Note that the process of setting the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display 8 may be included in the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

  The special symbol changing process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol changing process includes a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol change is started in the special symbol display 8. For example, every time the special symbol variation processing in step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or added by one, The elapsed time in the special symbol game using the special symbol is measured by the special symbol indicator 8. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the change of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and setting for stopping and displaying the fixed special symbol as a result of the special symbol display (derived display). ing. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special figure display result is “big hit”. Correspondingly, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. When the big hit flag is OFF, the special figure process flag value is updated to “4” in response to the special figure display result being “small hit”.

  The bonus release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the pre-opening process of the bonus item, setting at a stage before the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the starting operation in the small hit gaming state is performed. The process of releasing an accessory in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of an accessory, control of a starting operation for changing the variable winning ball apparatus 20 between an open state and a closed state is performed based on the accessory release operation control pattern. In addition, the process during opening of an accessory is a process for detecting a game ball that has entered the inside of the variable prize ball apparatus 20, a game ball that has been discharged, a game ball that has won a prize (V prize) in the specific prize opening 66A, and the like. Is also included. The post-release processing of the accessory in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the post-release processing of the accessory, setting for ending the small hit gaming state is performed. At this time, if a game ball that has won a prize (V prize) is detected in the specific winning opening 66A, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7” in response to being controlled to the big hit gaming state. If a game ball that has won (V winning) in the specific winning opening 66A has not been detected, the special process flag is set to “0” corresponding to the end of the small hit game state without entering the big hit game state. Update to 0 ”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, setting at a stage before starting the round in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate 16 in the big hit gaming state is performed. The special winning opening opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The processing during opening of the big prize opening includes setting for opening the big prize opening in each round, measuring the time elapsed since the big prize opening was opened, the elapsed time measured, and the count switch 23. Based on the number of game balls detected by the above, a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to return the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state to end one round. The special winning opening opening post-processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This process after opening the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round for opening the big prize opening reaches the number corresponding to the number of rounds at the big hit. The big hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a predetermined time after opening the big winning opening after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is over and the winning opening is closed, This includes processing for setting an advantageous state to be controlled after completion.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 37 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 37, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in an on state, thereby detecting a game ball that has entered (passed through) the start winning opening. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S201).

  If the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is on in step S201 (step S201; Yes), a use table for determining whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The special figure display result determination table 131 is selected and set (step S202). For example, in the process of step S202, the storage address (first address) of the special figure display result determination table 131 in the ROM 54 is set in the use table pointer. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the special figure display result is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 503 or the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S203). . Based on the random value MR2 extracted in step S203, the special figure display result is determined by referring to the special figure display result determination table 131 set in step S202 (step S204). For example, in the process of step S204, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 extracted in step S203 is compared with the determination value indicated by the table data in the special figure display result determination table 131, and the determination that matches the random value MR2 is made. The special figure display result to which the value is assigned is determined as the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game. At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S204 is a “big hit” (step S205).

  When it is determined in step S205 that the game is “big hit” (step S205; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S206). Further, for example, a jackpot symbol such as a special symbol whose symbol number is “11” is set as a confirmed special symbol which is a special symbol display result in the special symbol game (step S207).

  When it is determined in step S205 that it is not “big hit” (step S205; No), various processes corresponding to the determination that the special figure display result is “small hit” are executed. As an example, in this embodiment, the small hit type determination table 132 is selected and set as a use table for determining the small hit type and the small hit symbol (step S208). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the small hit type is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 503 or the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S209). Then, based on the random value MR3 extracted in step S209, the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type determination table 132 set in step S208 (step S210). At this time, for example, by updating the memory of the small hit type buffer value in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the small hit type determined in step S210 is stored (step S211). Corresponding to the determination result in step S210, for example, one of the small winning symbols such as special symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “10” is set as a confirmed special symbol that is a special symbol display result in the special symbol game. (Step S212).

  When the process of step S212 is executed, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (step S213). Here, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the advantageous state, the advantageous state flag is on. If the advantageous state flag is ON (step S213; Yes), the advantageous state count value, which is the stored value of the advantageous state counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, is updated so as to be subtracted by 1 (step). S214). Here, an initial count value corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state is set in the advantageous state counter at the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, by subtracting 1 from the advantageous state count value by the process of step S214, each time the special figure game whose special figure display result does not become “big hit” is executed, the special figure game that can be executed in the advantageous state is executed. The remaining number is counted down.

  Subsequent to the process of step S214, setting for transmitting the advantageous state remaining number notification command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S215). In the processing of step S215, for example, the storage address of the advantageous state remaining number notification command table in the ROM 54 may be set in the transmission command buffer. The advantageous state remaining number notification command set in this way is effect control from the main board 31 via the relay board 177, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 36 after the special symbol process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 80. When the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state is separately counted on the side of the effect control board 80, the advantageous state remaining number notification command is transmitted by the setting in step S215. You don't have to. In this case, when the gaming state is in an advantageous state, the number of remaining special figure games in the advantageous state may be counted on the side of the effect control board 80 based on, for example, transmission / reception of a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the updated advantageous state count value in step S214 has become “0” (step S216). At this time, if the advantageous state count value is “0” (step S216; Yes), the advantageous state end flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on in response to ending the advantageous state. Set (step S217).

  After executing the process of step S207, when the advantageous state flag is OFF in step S213 (step S213; No), or when the advantageous state count value is other than “0” in step S216 (step S216; No) ) Alternatively, after executing the process of step S217, a setting for transmitting a special figure display result notification command to the effect control board 80 is performed according to the determination result in step S204 or step S210 (step S204). S218). In the process of step S218, for example, the storage address of the special figure display result notification command table in the ROM 54 may be set in the transmission command buffer. The special-figure display result notification command set in this way is effect-controlled from the main board 31 through the relay board 177, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 36 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 80. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the special figure variation pattern setting process (step S219), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  If the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal process flag is “0” (step S220). At this time, if the value of the ordinary figure process flag is “0” (step S220; Yes), variable display of the normal symbol in the ordinary figure game, control for opening the start winning opening based on the display result, and the like are performed. Since it has not been started, set up to display a demonstration (demo screen display). That is, for example, by checking a demonstration display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display command has been transmitted (step S221). Here, the demo display flag is set to the on state in response to the transmission of the customer waiting demo display command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, while in response to the start of the ordinary game or the special game. It only needs to be cleared and turned off. In this case, in the process of step S221, it may be determined whether the customer waiting demonstration display command has been transmitted or not transmitted in accordance with whether the demonstration display flag is on or off. When the customer waiting demonstration display command is not transmitted but not transmitted in step S221 (step S221; No), after setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration display command to the effect control board 80 is performed. (Step S222), the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the usual process flag is other than “0” in step S220 (step S220; No), or when the customer waiting demonstration display command has been transmitted in step S221 (step S221; Yes), the special symbol normal process is terminated without executing the process of step S222.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 in FIG. 37 as the special figure variation pattern setting process. In the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 56 first selects and sets the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 135 as a use table for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern (step S231). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR6 for determining the special figure variation pattern is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 503 or the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S232). Then, based on the random number value MR6 extracted in step S232, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 135 set in step S231 (step S233). ). At this time, for example, depending on whether or not the big hit flag is turned on, whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” may be specified, and then the special figure variation pattern determination table 135 may be referred to.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S233, setting for transmitting a special figure variation pattern designation command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S234). Further, for example, a special figure fluctuation time T01 as shown in FIG. 25B is set corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S233 (step S235). In the process of step S235, the timer initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time T01 in the determined special figure fluctuation pattern may be set in the special figure fluctuation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Further, for example, a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, such as a reading setting of the special symbol display control data stored in the ROM 54, is performed (step S236). Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S237), and the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 37 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, for example (step S251). Here, the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S255 described later, corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol that is the special figure display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S251 (step S251; No), for example, among the special symbol display control data stored in the ROM 54, the control data corresponding to the fixed special symbol is read and set. The setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is performed (step S252). At this time, a setting for transmitting a special figure confirmation command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S253). Further, a predetermined time (for example, 800 ms) is set as the special figure confirmation display time T02 (step S254). For example, in the process of step S254, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time T02 may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step S255), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S252, the special symbol process process corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special figure fixed display time T02 set in step S254 elapses. Each time the symbol stop process is executed, it is determined in step S251 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S251 (step S251; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time T02 has elapsed (step S256). For example, in the process of step S256, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S254, is updated to be decremented by 1, and the updated timer value is “ It may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time T02 has elapsed, depending on whether or not “0” has been reached. At this time, if the special figure confirmation display time T02 has not elapsed (step S256; No), the special symbol stop process is ended, and the process waits until the special figure confirmation display time T02 has elapsed. When the special figure confirmation display time T02 has elapsed in step S256 (step S256; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S257), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Is determined (step S258).

  When the big hit flag is ON in step S258 (step S258; Yes), a setting for transmitting the big hit notification command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S259). In addition, the initial value of the big prize opening opening count is set (step S260). At this time, in response to the special figure display result being “big hit”, if the big winning hour round number “15” is set in the big winning opening opening counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 Good. Then, the CPU 56 sets a big hit state start waiting time (step S261). For example, in the process of step S261, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit state start waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Thereafter, for example, a big hit state pre-start flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is set to an on state (step S262).

  Following the process of step S262, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the advantageous state flag is on (step S263; Yes), processing for temporarily ending the advantageous state is executed in response to being controlled to the big hit gaming state. For example, while the big hit advantageous flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S264), the advantageous state flag is cleared to an off state (step S265). Further, the advantageous state counter is cleared and its count value is initialized to “0” (step S266). By setting the big hit advantage flag in the ON state in step S264, it can be stored that the gaming state was in an advantageous state before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  When the advantageous state flag is off in step S263 (step S263; No), after the process of step S266 is executed, the advantageous state end flag is cleared and set to the off state (step S267). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “7” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S268), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S258 (step S258; No), for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided in response to the special figure display result in the special figure game being “small hit”. The given pre-release setting flag is set to the on state (step S269). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-release process (step S270), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S114 of FIG. 37 as the accessory release pre-process. 41, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the pre-opening setting flag is on (step S281). At this time, if the pre-opening setting flag is on (step S281; Yes), the pre-opening setting flag is cleared and turned off (step S282).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S282, the pre-opening time setting table 137 is selected and set as a use table for setting the pre-opening time T03 (step S283). Also, the symbol number of the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed in the special symbol game that has been triggered to be controlled to the small hit gaming state is specified (step S284). Then, based on the symbol number specified in step S284, by referring to the accessory pre-release time setting table 137 set in step S283, the symbol number varies depending on the symbol number of the small hit symbol that has become the confirmed special symbol. A time T03 before opening of an accessory is set (step S285). For example, in the process of step S285, a numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the pre-opening time T03 specified from the pre-opening set setting table 137 according to the symbol number of the small hit symbol that has become the confirmed special symbol. In addition, it is possible to compare the start operation control timer value, which is the stored value of the start operation control timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, with a pre-opening time determination value buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, etc. Set to.

  After executing the process of step S285, a predetermined time (for example, 14500 ms) set in advance as the first reservoir opening time T10 is set (step S286). For example, in the process of step S286, the first storage provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 so that a numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the first storage unit pre-opening time T10 can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to the time judgment value buffer etc. before a part release. In addition, a predetermined time (for example, 27000 ms) that is longer than the first pre-opening time T10 is set as the second pre-opening time T11 (step S287). For example, in the process of step S287, the second storage provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 so that the numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the second storage unit pre-opening time T11 can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to the time judgment value buffer etc. before a part release. Furthermore, a predetermined time (for example, 22676 ms) set in advance so as to be longer than the first reservoir opening time T10 is set as the movable member lowering time T12 (step S288). For example, in the process of step S288, the movable member lowering time provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 so that the numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the movable member lowering time T12 can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to a judgment value buffer.

  Here, for example, when the time T10 before opening the first reservoir is set to 14500 ms, if 27000 ms is set as the time T11 before opening the second reservoir, the time is longer by 12500 ms than the time T10 before opening the first reservoir. . Moreover, if 22676 ms is set as the time T12 before the movable member descends, the time is longer by 8176 ms than the time T10 before the first reservoir opening. Then, after the storage state (stop state) of the game ball once stored (stopped) in the first storage unit is released (released), the game ball is discharged to the outside of the variable winning ball device 20 It is sufficient that the inclined portion 73, the rotating body 86, and the like are configured so that the required time is about 3000 ms to 5000 ms. In this case, the game balls that have passed through the first path 900A among the game balls that have entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 are discharged to the outside of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. The first time is shorter than the second time until the game ball that has passed through the second path 900B is discharged to the outside of the variable winning ball device 20 and detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. In addition, the third time from the start of the small hit gaming state in which the starting operation for opening the variable winning ball device 20 is executed until the game ball is stopped by the second storage unit is from the first time. Also gets longer. Thereby, after it is determined whether or not the game ball that has passed through the first path 900A enters (passes) into the specific winning opening 66A, the game ball that passes through the second path 900B is placed in a stopped state by the second storage unit. It can be released and guided to one of a plurality of areas such as the specific winning port 66A and the outlet 83, and the expectation that a V winning will occur can be increased step by step.

  Following the processing of step S288, a movable member effect operation period U01 is set (step S289). For example, in the process of step S289, numerical values (determination values) corresponding to a plurality of timings such as the start timing, end timing, or operation switching timing of the movable member effect operation period U01 can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to the movable member effect | action period determination value buffer etc. which were provided in the game control buffer setting part 155. Here, in the movable member effect operation period U01, the game ball passing through the second path 900B is moved inside the movable member 77 by moving the movable member 77 down for a short time (for example, 48 ms) and then raising it. An effect operation using the movable member 77 is executed prior to passing through. For example, the start timing of the movable member effect operation period U01 is the same as the first storage portion release timing at which the storage state (stop state) of the game balls in the first storage portion is released after the first storage portion opening time T10 elapses. Should be set to be. As a result, when the game ball is stopped in the first storage part, the game ball released from the first storage part is variably awarded by performing an effect operation by moving the movable member 77 for a short time. It is possible to enhance the expectation that a V winning will occur before the ball device 20 is discharged to the outside. After the setting in step S289, by starting the start operation control timer (step S290), the elapsed time in the small hit gaming state in which the start operation for changing the variable winning ball apparatus 20 between the open state and the closed state is performed is performed. Is started, and then the pre-release process for the accessory is completed.

  When the pre-opening setting flag is OFF in step S281 (step S281; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-opening time T03 has elapsed (step S291). For example, in the process of step S291, the start operation control timer value updated so as to be incremented by 1 every time a timer interrupt occurs is set to a pre-opening time determination value that is a stored value of the pre-opening time determination value buffer. Compared to the buffer value, it may be determined whether or not the pre-release time T03 has elapsed, depending on whether or not they match. At this time, if the pre-opening time T03 has not elapsed (step S291; No), the pre-opening processing is finished. On the other hand, when the pre-opening time T03 elapses in step S291 (step S291; Yes), for example, the free opening start setting flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is set to the on state. (Step S292). Then, after the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the process during releasing the accessory (step S293), the process before releasing the accessory is ended.

  42 to 44 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S115 of FIG. In this process of releasing an accessory, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an accessory release start setting flag is on (step S301 in FIG. 42). At this time, if the accessory release start setting flag is on (step S301; Yes), the accessory release start setting flag is cleared and set to an off state (step S302).

  Following the processing of step S302, the accessory release pattern setting table 138 is selected and set as a use table for determining and setting one of a plurality of types of accessory release operation control patterns (step S303). In addition, by reading the small hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified which of the plural types of the small hit type (step S304). Then, by referring to the accessory release pattern setting table 138 set in step S303 based on the small hit type specified in step S304, the small hit types are “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”. ”Is selected from the combination release operation control pattern CYA to the combination release operation control pattern CYF and set as a use pattern (step S305).

  After executing the process of step S305, an accessory release control time T20 is set (step S306). For example, in the process of step S306, the game control buffer setting is set so that data indicating the accessory release control time T20 is read from the accessory release operation control pattern selected in step S305 and can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to the accessory release control time judgment value buffer etc. which were provided in the part 155. As a specific example, when the small hit type is “first small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the accessory release operation control pattern CYA shown in FIG. 28A is selected in step S305. Based on the above, data indicating 1700 ms is read as the accessory release control time T20. At this time, a numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the added value of the elapsed time specified from the start operation control timer value and the accessory release control time T20 may be set in the accessory release control time determination value buffer. Subsequently, open solenoid output data is set (step S307). For example, in the process of step S307, the release solenoid output data stored following the data indicating the accessory release control time T20 is read with the accessory release operation control pattern selected in step S305, and the game control buffer is set. What is necessary is just to set to the port output buffer etc. which were provided in the part 155. Here, in the solenoid output process of step S20 shown in FIG. 36, the opening solenoid 75 is driven based on the opening solenoid output data set in the port output buffer, so that the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened and closed. Is called.

  Following the process of step S307, an accessory release time is set (step S308). For example, in the process of step S308, the game control buffer setting is set so that the data indicating the accessory release time stored following the open solenoid output data read in the process of step S307 can be read and compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to the accessory release time judgment value buffer etc. which were provided in the part 155. As a specific example, when the small hit type is “first small hit” or “fourth small hit”, a bonus release time of 1700 ms is indicated from the bonus release operation control pattern CYA shown in FIG. Data is read out. At this time, a numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the added value of the elapsed time specified from the start operation control timer value and the accessory release time may be set in the accessory release time determination value buffer. Further, the CPU 56 clears the in-function game ball counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and initializes the in-function game ball count value, which is the stored value, to “0” (step S309). . And after performing the setting for transmitting an accessory release command with respect to the effect control board 80 (step S310), the process during an accessory release is complete | finished. For example, in the process of step S310, the number of continuations of the advantageous state is specified by reading the continuous advantageous count value or the like. Further, by checking an advantageous state end flag or the like, it is determined whether or not the starting operation is based on the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. Depending on the result of specifying the number of continuations of such an advantageous state or the result of determining whether or not the start operation is based on the final special game, a setting for transmitting an accessory release command with different EXT data is performed. It's fine. On the side of the effect control board 80, the start timing for starting the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the small hit gaming state can be specified by the bonus release command transmitted from the main board 31. In addition, as an effect operation corresponding to the start operation being performed, an effect operation with different effect modes depending on the number of continuations of the advantageous state and whether or not it is the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. And can be executed by a predetermined effect device.

  When the accessory release start setting flag is OFF in step S301 (step S301; No), the accessory release control time T20 is based on, for example, the start operation control timer value or the stored value of the accessory release control time determination value buffer. It is determined whether or not elapses (step S311). As an example, in the process of step S311, the game operation microcomputer 560 compares the start operation control timer value incremented by one each time a timer interrupt occurs with the stored value of the accessory release control time determination value buffer. Depending on whether or not they match, it may be determined whether or not the accessory release control time T20 has elapsed. In other words, when the start operation control timer value matches the stored value of the accessory release control time buffer, it may be determined that the accessory release control time T20 has elapsed. At this time, if the accessory release control time T20 has not elapsed (step S311; No), for example, based on the start operation control timer value or the stored value of the accessory release time determination value buffer, the accessory release time or the accessory It is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed (step S312). As an example, in the process of step S312, a start operation control timer value that is incremented by 1 every time a timer interrupt occurs in the game control microcomputer 560 is compared with the stored value of the accessory release time determination value buffer. It may be determined whether or not the accessory opening time or the accessory closing time has elapsed depending on whether or not the two match. That is, when the start operation control timer value matches the stored value of the accessory release control time buffer, it may be determined that the accessory release time or the accessory close time has elapsed. Here, the accessory closing time may be set in the process of step S327 shown in FIG. 43 described later.

  If the bonus release time or bonus closing time has not elapsed in step S312 (step S312; No), the first bonus is obtained by checking the detection signal transmitted from the first bonus winning switch 71a. It is determined whether or not the winning switch 71a is on (step S313). At this time, if the first winning combination winning switch 71a is ON (step S313; Yes), the winning combination corresponding to the detection of the gaming ball winning the first entrance 71 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected. The internal game ball count value is incremented by 1 and updated (step S314), and a setting for transmitting the first prize winning notification command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S315).

  When the first winning combination winning switch 71a is OFF in step S313 (step S313; No), after executing the process of step S315, the detection signal transmitted from the second winning winning combination switch 72a is checked. Thus, it is determined whether or not the second prize winning switch 72a is on (step S316). At this time, if the second winning combination winning switch 72a is on (step S316; Yes), the winning combination corresponding to the detection of the gaming ball that has won the second entrance 72 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected. The in-game game ball count value is incremented by 1 (step S317), and a setting is made to transmit the second bonus item winning notification command to the effect control board 80 (step S318). Thus, when the second prize winning switch 72 a is turned on, a second prize winning notification command different from the first prize winning notification command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. On the side of the effect control board 80, a predetermined effect may be executed in different effect operation modes depending on whether the first character winning prize notification command or the second character winning prize notification command is received. As a result, when a game ball wins the second entrance 72, an effect operation different from that when the game ball wins the first entrance 71 can be performed.

  When the accessory release time or the accessory close time has elapsed in step S312 (step S312; Yes), the next release solenoid output data is set (step S319 in FIG. 43). For example, in the process of step S319, in the accessory release operation control pattern, the release solenoid output data stored following the data indicating the already used accessory release time or the accessory close time is read, and the port output buffer is read out. You can set it. Thereafter, it is determined whether the data stored following the open solenoid output data set in step S319 is an end code (step S320).

  When it is determined in step S320 that the code is not an end code (step S320; No), an accessory release time or an accessory closing time is set (step S321), and then the accessory releasing process is ended. For example, in the process of step S321, data indicating the accessory opening time or the accessory closing time stored following the open solenoid output data read in the process of step S320 is read. If the data read at this time indicates the accessory release time, the accessory release time may be set by updating the stored value of the accessory release time determination value buffer, for example. Further, if the read data indicates the accessory closing time, for example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is configured so that the numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the read data can be compared with the start operation control timer value. It may be set in the accessory closing time judgment value buffer provided in. At this time, a numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the added value of the elapsed time specified from the start operation control timer value and the accessory closing time may be set in the accessory closing time determination value buffer.

  When it is determined in step S320 that the code is an end code (step S320; Yes), a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) set in advance is set as the post-opening time T21 (step S321). For example, in the process of step S321, the time after opening of the accessory provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 so that the numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the time T21 after opening of the accessory can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to a judgment value buffer. And after performing the setting for transmitting the accessory closing command with respect to the effect control board 80 (step S322), the processing during the opening of the accessory is ended. On the side of the performance control board 80, the timing at which the start operation for opening the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the small hit gaming state is completed (completed) can be specified by the accessory closing command transmitted from the main board 31. it can. Here, in the accessory release operation control patterns CYA to CYD shown in FIGS. 28A to 28D and the accessory release operation control patterns CYE and CYF shown in FIGS. The item opening control time T20 is set to be equal to the sum of the item opening time and the item closing time. Therefore, after the end code is determined in step S320, it is determined that the accessory release control time T20 has elapsed if the process of step S311 shown in FIG. 42 is executed. Processing is not performed. However, when the process of step S312 is executed after it is determined in step S320 that it is an end code due to the occurrence of an error, for example, as in the case where the accessory release time or the accessory close time has not elapsed. Then, the process may proceed to step S313.

  When the accessory release control time T20 has elapsed in step S311 of FIG. 42 (step S311; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the post-release time T21 set in step S321 of FIG. 43 has elapsed. (Step S324 in FIG. 44). At this time, if the time T21 after the release of the accessory has not elapsed (step S324; No), the process proceeds to the process of step S313 shown in FIG. Thereby, even after the start operation is finished and the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the closed state, the processing of steps S313 to S318 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to detect a game ball that has entered (winned) a bonus entry such as the first entry 71 or the second entry 72.

  When the time T21 after the bonus release has elapsed in step S324 (step S324; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball count value in the bonus is “0” (step S325). At this time, if the game ball count value in the bonus game is “0” (step S325; Yes), for example, a post-discharge setting flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is set to the on state (step S326). . Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6” which is a value corresponding to the post-function release process (step S327), and the process during the bonus release is ended. In this way, when it is determined in step S325 that the in-function game ball count value is “0”, the game ball has not entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 that has been opened in the starting operation. Alternatively, when all of the game balls that have entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 are discharged, it is possible to make a setting for shifting from the process during opening of an accessory to the post-release process.

  When the game ball count value in the accessory is other than “0” in step S325 (step S325; No), it is determined whether or not the first storage unit release flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. Determination is made (step S328). Here, the first storage unit release flag is set to the on state when the storage state (stop state) of the game balls in the first storage unit is released, while it is off when the game ball is in the storage state (stop state). It becomes a state. When the first storage unit release flag is off in step S328 (step S328; No), for example, based on the stored value of the start operation control timer value and the first storage unit pre-opening time determination value buffer, etc. It is determined whether or not the pre-opening time T10 has elapsed (step S329).

  When the first reservoir pre-opening time T10 has elapsed in step S329 (step S329; Yes), the first reservoir solenoid 90a is driven to move (retract) the first reservoir member 93a. The release setting for setting the 1 storage unit to the open state (release state) is performed (step S330). Moreover, a 1st storage part cancellation | release flag is set to an ON state (step S331).

  When a game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is stored in the first storage unit via the first path 900A, the processing of steps S328 to S331 is executed. When the fixed first storage portion opening time T10 has elapsed since the start of the small hit gaming state, the stop state in the first storage portion is released and temporarily stored (stopped) in the first storage portion. The game ball is guided to the rotator 86 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C). Then, when a winning is made to the specific winning opening 66A, a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 66a in a process of step S345 described later, and when it is discharged without winning the specific winning opening 66A, a step to be described later In the process of S343, a game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. Note that even when a winning is made in the specific winning opening 66A, it is only necessary that the game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a in the process of step S343.

  When the first storage part release flag is on in step S328 (step S328; Yes), when the first storage part opening time T10 has not elapsed in step S329 (step S329; No), or After performing the process of step S331, it is determined whether the 2nd storage part cancellation | release flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is ON (step S332). Here, the second storage unit release flag is set to the on state when the game ball storage state (stop state) in the second storage unit is released, while it is off when the game ball is in the storage state (stop state). It becomes a state. When the second storage unit release flag is off in step S332 (step S332; No), for example, based on the starting operation control timer value and the stored value of the second storage unit pre-opening time determination value buffer, the second storage unit It is determined whether or not the pre-opening time T11 has elapsed (step S333).

  When the second reservoir pre-opening time T11 has elapsed in step S333 (step S333; Yes), the second reservoir solenoid 90b is driven to move (retract) the second reservoir member 93b. 2 Release setting is performed to set the storage part to an open state (release state) (step S334). At this time, a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) may be set in advance as the second reservoir pre-closing time T13. Moreover, a 2nd storage part cancellation | release flag is set to an ON state (step S335).

  Here, for example, when the time T12 before the movable member lowering is set to 22672 ms, if 27000 ms is set as the second reservoir pre-opening time T11, the time becomes 4328 ms longer than the time T12 before the movable member lowering. For example, the time required for the movable member 77 to move downward until the left end portion is lowered downward is 1324 ms, and the state in which the movable member 77 is inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left is referred to as a movable member lowering stop time. It is sufficient that the left end portion of the movable member 77 is raised after maintaining until 5000 ms elapses. In this case, when the stored state (stopped state) of the game ball once stored (stopped) in the second storage unit is released (released), the movable member 77 is inclined, and the second The game ball released from the storage unit can pass through the inside of the movable member 77 and guide the game ball to the path member 95.

  When the second reservoir release flag is on in step S332 (step S332; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second reservoir pre-closing time T13 has elapsed (step S336). At this time, if the second reservoir pre-closing time T13 has elapsed (step S336; Yes), the setting for stopping the driving of the second reservoir solenoid 90b and moving (advancing) the second reservoir member 93b. The closing setting for setting the second storage unit to the storage state (stopped state) is performed (step S337). In addition, the second storage section release flag is cleared and turned off (step S338).

  After that, for example, based on the start operation control timer value, the stored value of the movable member effect operation period determination value buffer, etc., it is determined whether or not it is within the movable member effect operation period U01 (step S339). At this time, if it is within the period of the movable member effect operation period U01 (step S339; Yes), the setting for executing the effect operation using the movable member 77 is performed (step S340). When it is not within the period of the movable member effect operation period U01 in step S339 (step S339; No), it is determined whether or not the time T12 before moving member descending has elapsed after executing the process of step S340 ( Step S341). When the time T12 before descent of the movable member has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), the movable member control process is executed (step S342).

  When the second prize winning switch 72a is OFF in step S316 of FIG. 42 (step S316; No), after executing the process of step S318, or before the movable member descending time in step S341 of FIG. When T12 has not elapsed (step S341; No), or after performing the movable member control process in step S342, the accessory discharge is performed by checking the detection signal transmitted from the accessory discharge switch 85a. It is determined whether or not the switch 85a is on (step S343). At this time, if the accessory discharge switch 85a is on (step S343; Yes), the game ball count value in the accessory corresponding to the detection of the game ball discharged from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected. 1 is updated by subtracting 1 (step S344).

  When the accessory discharge switch 85a is off in step S343 (step S343; No), or after executing the process of step S344, the detection is performed by checking the detection signal transmitted from the specific area switch 66a. It is determined whether or not the area switch 66a is on (step S345). At this time, if the specific area switch 66a is OFF (step S345; No), the process of releasing the accessory is ended. On the other hand, when the specific area switch 66a is on in step S345 (step S345; Yes), the V winning flag is set to the on state in response to the game ball entering the specific winning opening 66A. At the same time (step S346), after the setting for transmitting the V prize notification command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S347), the process of releasing the bonus is ended.

  When the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is stored in the second storage unit via the second path 900B, the processing of steps S332 to S342 is executed, When a certain second pre-opening time T11 has elapsed since the start of the small hit gaming state, the stopped state in the second storing unit is released, and the game is temporarily stored (stopped) in the second storing unit. The sphere is guided to the movable member 77. At this time, since the movable member 77 is moved so as to be inclined obliquely from the upper right to the lower left, the game ball passes through the movable member 77 and is guided to the rotating body 86. (See FIGS. 10A and 10B). Thereafter, when a winning is made to the specific winning opening 66A, the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 66a in the process of step S345, and when it is discharged without winning the specific winning opening 66A, it is used in the process of step S343. A game ball is detected by the object discharge switch 85a. Note that even when a winning is made in the specific winning opening 66A, it is only necessary that the game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a in the process of step S343.

  Note that the processing in steps S313 to S318 shown in FIG. 42 and the processing in steps S343 to S347 shown in FIG. 44 are, for example, processing executed between processing during the processing of opening the processing and processing after the processing of opening the processing. It may be executed as a process separate from the opening process. Further, even before the accessory release control time T20 has elapsed in step S311, for example, when it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the starting operation is performed. You may make it complete | finish and return the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to a closed state. Furthermore, when it is determined in step S345 that the specific area switch 66a is on, the small hit gaming state may be immediately terminated and the big hit gaming state may be controlled.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S342 of FIG. 44 as the movable member control process. In the movable member control process shown in FIG. 45, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not a movable member operating flag indicating that the movable member 77 is operating is on (step S551). At this time, if the movable member operation flag is off (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not the movable member operation completion flag indicating that the arrangement of the movable member 77 has already been changed is on (step S552). ). If the movable member operation completion flag is on (step S552; Yes), the movable member control process is terminated.

  If the movable member operation completion flag is OFF in step S552 (step S552; No), settings are made to start the arrangement change of the movable member 77 by driving the movable member drive motor 77B (step S553). . As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 6, the state is inclined from the upper horizontal position inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the lower left position in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 from the upper right to the lower left. In addition, the arrangement of the movable member 77 is changed. In addition, when the arrangement of the decoration member 78 is changed in conjunction with the change in the arrangement of the movable member 77, for example, as shown in FIG. 6, the coordinated movement is performed so that the decoration member 78 overlaps the front of the movable member 77. Done. When the process of step S553 is executed, the movable member operating flag is set to the on state (step S554), and the movable member control process is terminated.

  When the movable member operating flag is on in step S551 (step S551; Yes), the lower position sensor 91b is turned on by checking the detection signal transmitted from the lower position sensor 91b. Is determined (step S555). At this time, if the lower position sensor 91b is off (step S555; No), the movable member control process is terminated, and control is performed so that the arrangement change of the movable member 77 is continued.

  When the lower position sensor 91b is on in step S555 (step S555; Yes), the setting for stopping the change of the arrangement of the movable member 77 by stopping the drive of the movable member drive motor 77B is performed (step S555). S556). At this time, the movable member operating flag is cleared and turned off (step S557). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 5000 ms) is set as a movable member lowering stop time that is a time for maintaining the tilted state by moving the movable member 77 down (step S558). And after setting a movable member operation completion flag to an ON state (Step S559), movable member control processing is ended. In this embodiment, when the left end portion of the movable member 77 moves to the lowest position and the arrangement change is stopped in step S556, the movable member 77 is kept until the movable member lowering stop time set in step S558 elapses. The tilted state is maintained. Then, when the movable member lowering stop time has elapsed, control for returning the movable member 77 to the initial position is started by the movable member initial position control process of step S21 shown in FIG.

  46 and 47 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S116 of FIG. 37 as the post-opening process. In this post-release processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the second storage section release flag is on (step S351). At this time, if the second storage section release flag is on (step S351; Yes), the second storage section solenoid 90b is stopped and the second storage member 93b is moved (expanded). 2 Close setting which makes a storage part a storage state (stop state) is performed (step S352). Further, the second storage section release flag is cleared and turned off (step S353).

  As described above, in the post-opening processing, the processing of steps S351 to S353 is executed. Here, for example, although the release setting for releasing (releasing) the storage state (stationary state) of the second storage unit is performed by the process of step S334 shown in FIG. Prior to determining that the time has elapsed, it is determined in the process of step S325 that the game ball count value in the bonus game is “0”, and the process of releasing the bonus game ends. Then, it is considered that the second storage part cannot be restored from the released state to the closed state. Even in this case, it is possible to reliably return the second storage unit from the released state to the closed state by performing the processes of steps S351 to S353 in the post-opening process.

  When the second storage section release flag is off in step S351 (step S351; No), after executing the process of step S353, it is determined whether the post-discharge setting flag is on (step S354). ). Here, after the processing of step S326 shown in FIG. 44 is executed, when the post-release processing of the accessory is executed in response to the next timer interrupt or the like, the post-discharge setting flag is on.

  When the post-discharge setting flag is on in step S354 (step S354; Yes), the post-discharge setting flag is cleared and set to an off state (step S355). In addition, a setting for transmitting a discharge completion detection command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S356). Then, a predetermined time (for example, 5800 ms) is set as the post-discharge completion time T22 (step S357). For example, in the process of step S357, the post-discharge completion time determination value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 so that the numerical value (determination value) corresponding to the post-discharge completion time T22 can be compared with the start operation control timer value. What is necessary is just to set to a buffer etc.

  Following the processing in step S357, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON (step S358). At this time, if the V winning flag is ON (step S358; Yes), the post-opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is OFF in step S358 (step S358; No), it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end flag is ON (step S359). If the advantageous state end flag is off (step S359; No), the post-opening process for the accessory is ended. On the other hand, when the advantageous state end flag is ON in step S359 (step S359; Yes), a setting is made to end the advantageous state in response to the end of the small hit gaming state. At this time, the CPU 56 first clears the advantageous state end flag to turn it off (step S360). Further, a setting for transmitting an advantageous state end notification command corresponding to the continuous advantageous count value to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S361). By transmitting such an advantageous state end notification command, when the advantageous state ends and the normal state is controlled with the end of the small hit gaming state, the number of times that the advantageous state has continued until that time is controlled. 80 can be notified. Thereafter, the continuous advantageous counter is cleared and the continuous advantageous count value is initialized (invalidated) to “0” (step S362), the advantageous state flag is cleared and turned off (step S363), After clearing the advantageous state counter and initializing it to the initial value “0” (step S364), various flags and counters are initialized, and then the post-function release processing ends.

  When the post-discharge setting flag is OFF in step S354 (step S354; No), for example, has the post-discharge completion time T22 elapsed based on the starting operation control timer value, the stored value of the post-discharge completion time determination value buffer, etc. It is determined whether or not (step S365 in FIG. 47). At this time, if the post-discharge completion time T22 has not elapsed (step S365; No), the post-opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when the post-discharge completion time T22 has elapsed in step S365 (step S365; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first reservoir release flag is on (step S366). And if the 1st storage part cancellation | release flag is ON (step S366; Yes), 1st such as the setting for stopping the drive of the 1st storage part solenoid 90a and moving the 1st storage member 93a (advancement) will be carried out. Close setting which makes a storage part a storage state (stop state) is performed (step S367). At this time, the first storage section release flag is cleared and turned off (step S368).

  When the first storage section release flag is off in step S366 (step S366; No), after executing the process of step S368, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is on (step S369). . At this time, if the V winning flag is ON (step S369; Yes), a setting for controlling to the big hit gaming state is performed based on the occurrence of the V winning. That is, the CPU 56 sets the jackpot flag to the on state (step S370) and performs setting for transmitting a jackpot notification command to the effect control board 80 (step S371). Also, an initial value for the big winning opening opening count is set (step S372). For example, in the process of step S372, it is specified whether the small hit type is a plurality of types such as “first small hit” to “seventh small hit” by reading the small hit type buffer value or the like. Then, the number of rounds at the big hit (see FIG. 20A) corresponding to the specified small hit type may be set in the big winning opening opening counter. Subsequent to the setting in step S372, a big hit state start waiting time is set (step S373). Further, the big hit state pre-start flag is set to the on state (step S374). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag is on (step S375).

  When the advantageous state flag is ON in step S375 (step S375; Yes), a process for temporarily ending the advantageous state is executed in response to being controlled to the big hit gaming state. For example, the big hit advantageous flag is set to the on state (step S376), while the advantageous state flag is cleared to the off state (step S377). Further, the advantageous state counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S378). By setting the big hit advantage flag in the ON state in step S376, it can be stored that the gaming state was in an advantageous state before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  When the advantageous state flag is off in step S375 (step S375; No), after the processing of step S378 is executed, the advantageous state end flag is cleared and set to the off state (step S379). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “7” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S380), the post-opening process is ended.

  When the V winning flag is OFF in step S369 (step S369; No), a small hit end command is sent to the effect control board 80 in response to the end of the small hit gaming state without the occurrence of a V winning. Are set for transmission (step S381). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S382), and then the post-opening process is ended. In this way, after the start operation for changing the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the open state in the small hit gaming state is completed, if no V prize is generated until the time T21 after the opening of the accessory has passed, the discharge is performed. After waiting for time T22 after completion, the small hit gaming state can be terminated. On the side of the effect control board 80, for example, an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state may be executed in a period until the time T22 after the discharge is completed. At this time, for example, if the advantageous state end notification command is transmitted due to the setting in step S361 in FIG. 46, for example, the effect operation for informing the end of the advantageous state is executed in different effect modes according to the number of times the advantageous state is continued. You can do so.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S117 in FIG. 48, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the big hit state pre-start flag is on (step S391). At this time, if the big hit state start flag is ON (step S391; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit state start waiting time has elapsed (step S392). And if the big hit state start waiting time has not passed (step S392; No), it waits until the big hit state start waiting time passes by ending the big winning opening opening pre-processing. On the side of the effect control board 80, for example, an effect operation for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is started may be executed in a period until the jackpot state start waiting time elapses.

  When the big hit state start waiting time has elapsed in step S392 (step S392; Yes), the big hit state start flag is cleared and turned off (step S393). In addition, a setting for transmitting a big hit start command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S394). Then, after setting the round start waiting time (step S395), the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is ended.

  When the big hit state pre-start flag is off in step S391 (step S391; No), it is determined whether or not the round start waiting has elapsed (step S396). At this time, if the round start waiting time has not elapsed (396; No), the process waits until the round start waiting time elapses by ending the pre-opening of the special winning opening.

  When the round start waiting time elapses in step S396 (step S396; Yes), the winning number counter is cleared and the winning number count value, which is the stored value, is initialized to “0” (step S397). In addition, a maximum winning opening maximum opening time (for example, 29000 ms) is set (step S398). At this time, for example, the solenoid 21 is driven and the opening / closing plate 16 is set to open the special winning opening (step S399). Furthermore, a setting for transmitting a round start command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S400). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “8” which is a value corresponding to the process for opening the big prize opening (step S401), the process for opening the big prize opening is ended.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S118 of FIG. 37 as the process for opening the big prize opening. In the special winning opening opening process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the special winning opening maximum opening time has elapsed (step S411). At this time, if the maximum winning opening maximum opening time has not elapsed (step S411; No), it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined maximum winning determination value (for example, “9”) (step S411). S412).

  When the maximum winning determination value is not reached in step S412 (step S412; No), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 is on by checking a detection signal transmitted from the count switch 23 (step S412; No). Step S413). If the count switch 23 is off (step S413; No), the special winning opening open process is terminated. On the other hand, when the count switch 23 is on (step S413; Yes), the winning number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S414), and then the large winning opening opening process is terminated.

  For example, when the maximum winning opening maximum opening time has elapsed in step S411 (step S411; Yes), or when the winning number count value reaches the maximum winning determination value in step S412 (step S412; Yes), for example, a solenoid The driving of 21 is stopped and the opening / closing plate 16 is set to close the special winning opening (step S415). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a round end command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S416). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “9” which is a value corresponding to the post-opening process for the big winning opening (step S417), the process for opening the special winning opening is ended.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of FIG. 50, first, the CPU 56 updates the special winning opening opening count value so that 1 is subtracted (step S421). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated big prize opening count value has become “0” (step S422). If the special winning opening opening count value is other than “0” (step S422; No), a round start waiting time is set (step S423), and the value of the special figure process flag is set to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening. After the corresponding value is updated to “7” (step S424), the post-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated. Thus, until it is determined by the process of step S422 that the updated big opening opening count value is “0”, the process of steps S117 to S119 shown in FIG. Multiple rounds of opening the grand prize opening can be executed.

  When the big winning opening release count value is “0” in step S422 (step S422; Yes), the time before the big hit end is set (step S425). At this time, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S426). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the big hit advantage flag is on (step S427). Here, if the big hit advantage flag is on (step S427; Yes), the continuous advantageous count is obtained in response to the special figure display result being “big hit” or the occurrence of a V prize in the advantageous state. The value is updated so as to add 1 (step S428). On the other hand, if the big hit advantage flag is off (step S427; No), in response to the fact that the special figure display result is “big hit” in the normal state or the V winning is generated, The continuous advantageous count value is set to “1” (step S429). Thereafter, a setting for transmitting a jackpot end command corresponding to the continuous advantageous count value to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S430). By transmitting such a jackpot end command, it is possible to notify the effect control board 80 of the number of times that the advantageous state has continued in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “10” which is a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S431), the post-opening process for the big prize opening is ended. Note that when the number of continuations of the advantageous state is separately counted on the side of the effect control board 80, the notification of the number of times that the advantageous state has been continued by the big hit end command may not be performed. In this case, for example, a big hit end command is used to notify whether the big hit advantage flag is on or off, and on the basis of the notification, the number of continuations of the advantageous state is counted on the side of the effect control board 80. That's fine.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of FIG. 37 as the big hit end process. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time before the jackpot end has elapsed (step S441). At this time, if the time before the jackpot end has not elapsed (step S441; No), the jackpot end processing is ended to wait until the time before the jackpot end has elapsed.

  When the time before the big hit end has elapsed in step S441 (step S441; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit advantageous flag is on (step S442). At this time, if the big hit advantage flag is on (step S442; Yes), the big hit advantage flag is cleared and turned off (step S443). Then, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON (step S444). If the V winning flag is OFF in step S444 (step S444; No), it corresponds to the special figure big hit in the advantageous state that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” during the advantageous state and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The advantageous state count initial value to be set is set (step S445). For example, in the process of step S445, by setting the initial value of “15” to the advantageous state counter, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to “15”. Set. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is ON in step S444 (step S444; Yes), the special figure display result becomes “small hit” during the advantageous state, and the game ball wins V in the small hit gaming state and wins big. An advantageous state count initial value corresponding to the V winning in the advantageous state of being controlled to the gaming state is set (step S446). For example, in the process of step S446, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to “10” by setting the initial value of “10” to the advantageous state counter. Set. When the process of step S446 is executed, the V winning flag is cleared and turned off (step S447).

  Even when the big hit advantage flag is off in step S442 (step S442; No), it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is on (step S448). Then, if the V winning flag is OFF in step S448 (step S448; No), the special figure display result becomes “big hit” during the normal state and corresponds to the big hit in the normal state where the big hit gaming state is controlled. The initial value of the advantageous state count is set (step S449). For example, in the process of step S449, by setting the initial value of “5” in the advantageous state counter, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to “5”. Set. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is ON in step S448 (step S448; Yes), the special figure display result becomes “small hit” during the normal state, and the game ball wins V in the starting operation state and wins big. An advantageous state count initial value corresponding to the V winning in the normal state that is controlled to the state is set (step S450). For example, in the process of step S450, by setting the initial value of “3” to the advantageous state counter, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to “3”. Set. When the process of step S450 is executed, the V winning flag is cleared and turned off (step S451).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S445, S447, S449, and S451, the advantageous state flag is set to the on state (step S452), and an advantageous state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Setting is performed (step S453). In the process of step S452, the advantageous state flag is set to the on state in response to the end of the big hit gaming state regardless of the continuous advantageous count value. Therefore, it is possible to always control the advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state without setting an upper limit on the number of times the advantageous state continues (so-called “continuous number of times”). On the other hand, when the continuous advantageous count value reaches a predetermined upper limit value, for example, by not performing the processing of steps S444 to S452, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state after the big hit gaming state. You may make it control. After executing the processing of step S453, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S454), and then the big hit end processing is ended.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 of FIG. 36 as normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 52, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the gate switch 32a is on by checking a detection signal transmitted from the gate switch 32a (step S131). At this time, if the gate switch 32a is on (step S131; Yes), the general figure hold storage count value indicating the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of reserved data stored in the general figure hold storage unit 151, is the normal figure hold. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”) (step S132).

  In step S132, when the usual figure reservation memory count value is not the ordinary figure reservation upper limit value (step S132; No), the ordinary figure reservation memory count value is incremented by 1 and updated (step S133). Then, for example, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the normal display result is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S134). The data indicating the random value MR1 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151, whereby the random value MR1 is stored (step S135).

  When the gate switch 32a is off in step S131 (step S131; No), or in the case where the ordinary figure storage count value is the ordinary figure holding upper limit value in step S132 (step S132; Yes), or in step S135. After executing the process, one of the processes of steps S140 to S145 shown in FIG. 52 is selected and executed according to the value of the normal process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, whether or not a general symbol start condition for starting a general symbol game by the normal symbol display 10 is established based on whether or not the reserved data is stored in the general symbol storage unit 151. A determination is made. Further, in the normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol” based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the normal symbol display result.

  The usual figure variation pattern setting process of step S141 is executed when the value of the usual figure process flag is “1”. For example, the normal pattern change pattern setting process includes a process for determining a normal map change pattern, a process for setting a normal map change time corresponding to the determined normal map change pattern, and lighting control of the normal symbol display 10. A process for making a setting for starting the variation of the normal symbol is included.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. The normal symbol variation process includes a process of measuring an elapsed time after the variation of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol display 10. For example, every time the normal symbol variation process of step S142 is executed, the ordinary symbol display unit 10 uses the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display unit 10 by subtracting or adding 1 to the common symbol variation timer value stored in the ordinary symbol variation timer. The elapsed time in the usual game is measured. When the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation reaches the normal symbol variation time, the value of the general symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. The normal symbol stop process includes a process for setting the normal symbol display 10 to stop the fluctuation of the normal symbol and to stop and display the normal symbol display result (derived display). Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the common figure flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the common figure flag is on, the common figure display result is “normal figure”. Corresponding to “winning” or the like, the value of the general process flag is updated to “4”. In addition, when the usual figure hit flag is off, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “0” in response to the usual figure display result being “ordinary figure loss”.

  The start winning release pre-processing in step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In the start winning release pre-processing, setting for changing the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 from the closed state to the open state is performed. The start winning release post-processing in step S145 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “5”. In this start winning opening post-processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing operation of the starting winning opening has been completed. When the opening / closing operation is completed, the value of the general process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S140 of FIG. 52 as normal symbol normal processing. In the normal symbol normal process shown in FIG. 53, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the general figure hold storage count value is “0”, that is, the number of hold data stored in the general figure hold storage unit 151 is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S461). At this time, if the usual figure hold memory count value is “0” (step S461; Yes), the usual symbol normal process is terminated because the number of reserved data is “0” and the usual figure start condition is not satisfied. .

  In step S461, when the ordinary map storage count value is a value other than “0” (step S461; No), the ordinary map display result is used as a usage table for determining the ordinary map display result in the ordinary game. The decision table 130 is selected and set (step S462). Further, the hold data is read from the normal hold storage unit 151 (step S463). At this time, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the normal map display result is read as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the normal map storage unit 151.

  Subsequent to the process of step S463, 1 is subtracted from the general-purpose hold storage count value, and the general-purpose hold storage unit 151 corresponds to entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, hold numbers “2” to “4”). The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entry) are shifted upward by one entry (step S464). Then, based on the random number value MR1 read out in step S463, the common figure display result is determined by referring to the common figure display result determination table 130 set in step S462 (step S465). For example, in the process of step S465, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 read in step S463 and the normal map display result are determined according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the advantageous state. The decision value indicated by the table data in the table 130 is compared, and the usual figure display result to which the decision value matching the random number MR1 is assigned is decided as the variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game. At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S465 is “usually lost” (step S466).

  In the general map display result determination table 130, when the game state is in an advantageous state, the ratio that the general map display result is determined as “per 1st general map” or “per 2nd general map” is set, and the game state is in the normal state. The determined value to be compared with the random value MR1 is such that the map display result is higher than the ratio determined for “per 1st map” or “per 2nd map”. Assigned to. As a result, when the gaming state is in an advantageous state, the base map display result is more likely to be “per base” than in the normal state, thereby opening the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61. The frequency of state is improved. Further, the average usual figure change time when the gaming state is the advantageous state is set to be shorter than the average usual figure change time when the gaming state is the normal state. As a result, when the gaming state is in the advantageous state, the interval for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is shorter than in the normal state, so The interval at which the display result is derived and displayed is also shortened, and the frequency at which the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened is improved. Furthermore, when the game state is the normal state, the start opening time for the start winning opening to be in an open state corresponding to “per 1st map” is set to 100 ms, while the game display result is “per 1st map”. When the state is the advantageous state, the start opening time is set to 4000 ms in correspondence with the result of the normal map display corresponding to “per 1st general map”. As a result, when the gaming state is in an advantageous state, the average time for the start winning opening to be open is longer than in the normal state, and the starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 is opened. The frequency of state is improved.

  If it is determined in step S466 that the map is not “open map” (step S466; No), the map display result is “per map” such as “per first map” or “per second map”. Corresponding to the determination, the universal symbol hit flag is set to the on state (step S467) and, for example, the normal symbol display unit 10 determines that the six LEDs are lit in green. A symbol is set (step S468). When it is determined in step S466 that it is “ordinary figure loss” (step S466; Yes), for example, by determining that the six symbols are turned on in red on the normal symbol display 10, the ordinary figure loss symbol is displayed. Setting is made (step S469). In addition, when the normal map display result is determined to be “per normal map”, it is normal depending on whether the type per normal map is “per first general map” or “per second general map”. You may make it vary the lighting mode of LED in the symbol display 10. FIG. For example, when the per-common symbol type is “per first general symbol”, some of the six LEDs (eg, three LEDs) in the normal symbol display 10 are turned on in green, and the other LEDs are turned off. On the other hand, when the per-normal map type is “per second normal map”, all six LEDs may be lit in green.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S468 and S469, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is “0” (step S470). At this time, if the value of the special figure process flag is “0”, a setting for transmitting a general figure display result notification command corresponding to the general figure display result to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S471). On the other hand, when the value of the special figure process flag is other than “0” (step S470; No), the special effect display that is executed with priority over the normal effect display is being executed. The changing effect invalid flag is set to the on state (step S472), and the normal diagram display result notification command is not transmitted. Even when the special effect display is being executed, the normal figure display result notification command may be transmitted in response to the start of the change of the normal symbol in the normal figure game. After executing one of the processes of steps S471 and S472, the value of the ordinary map process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the ordinary map variation pattern setting process (step S473), and then the normal symbol normal The process ends.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S141 of FIG. 52 as the common map variation pattern setting process. 54, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the common figure flag is on (step S481). At this time, if the common figure hit flag is on (step S481; Yes), the normal figure change pattern determination table is used as a use table for determining any of the multiple patterns prepared in advance as one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance. 134A is selected and set (step S482). Further, for example, by checking whether or not the advantageous state flag is ON, it is specified whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the advantageous state (step S483). In this embodiment, in the case where variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to a general graphic game based on the fact that the general graphic display result is determined to be “per universal symbol”, at least variable display of decorative symbols is performed. The state becomes a reach state. Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of step S481 that the common symbol hit flag is ON, it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state.

  When the common symbol flag is off in step S481 (step S481; No), the reach determination table 133 is selected as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. Is set (step S484). Further, for example, by checking whether or not the advantageous state flag is ON, it is specified whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the advantageous state (step S485). Further, for example, by reading the usual figure reserved memory number count value, the usual figure reserved memory number that is the reserved memory number of the usual figure game is specified (step S486). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for reach determination is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S487). Based on the random value MR4 extracted in step S487 and the like, the reach determination table 133 set in step S484 is referred to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. (Step S488). At this time, it is determined whether or not there is a reach indicating that the determination result in step S488 is a reach state (step S489).

  When it is determined in step S489 that there is a reach (step S489; Yes), the reach variation pattern determination table 134B is selected as a use table for determining any of the multiple patterns prepared in advance as a common pattern variation pattern. Is set (step S490). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no reach in step S489 (step S489; No), the fluctuation at the time of non-reach is used as a use table for determining one of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the normal fluctuation pattern. The pattern determination table 134C is selected and set (step S491).

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S483, S490, and S491, for example, for determining the normal variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 503 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Numerical data indicating the random value MR5 is extracted (step S492). Then, based on the random value MR5 extracted in step S492, by referring to the common figure variation pattern determination table set as the usage pattern, the common figure variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns (step S493).

  After determining the normal map variation pattern in step S493, it is determined whether or not the normal map variation effect invalid flag is on (step S494). At this time, if the normal variation changing effect invalid flag is off (step S494; No), a normal variation variation designation command corresponding to the normal variation variation determined in step S493 is sent to the effect control board 80. Settings for transmission are performed (step S495). On the other hand, when the normal change effect invalid flag is on (step S494; Yes), the special effect display that is executed in preference to the normal effect display is being executed. Do not set by, do not send the usual map variation pattern designation command. Even when the special effect display is being executed, the normal pattern change pattern designation command may be transmitted in response to the start of the change of the normal symbol in the normal game.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the usual pattern fluctuation pattern determined in step S493, for example, a usual figure fluctuation time as shown in FIG. 24 is set (step S496). In the process of step S496, the timer initial value corresponding to the usual figure fluctuation time in the decided usual figure fluctuation pattern may be set in the usual figure fluctuation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Further, for example, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, such as the reading setting of the normal symbol display control data stored in the ROM 54, is performed (step S497). Then, after updating the value of the usual figure process flag to “2” which is a value corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation process (step S498), the usual figure fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S142 of FIG. 52 as the normal symbol variation process. In the normal symbol variation process shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the regular symbol variation time has elapsed (step S511). At this time, if the usual time fluctuation time has elapsed (step S511; Yes), the value of the common figure process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the normal symbol stop process (step S512). The normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the normal map change time has not elapsed in step S511 (step S511; No), it is determined whether or not the normal map change effect invalid flag is on (step S513). If the normal variation changing effect invalid flag is off (step S513; No), the normal symbol variation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the normal map change effect invalid flag is on (step S513; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is "0" (step S514). Here, if the value of the special figure process flag is other than “0” (step S514; No), the normal symbol variation process is terminated in response to the special effect display being executed. Note that the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the normal symbol in the normal game in step S497 of FIG. 54 is executed regardless of whether the normal change effect invalid flag is on. You can do so.

  When it is determined in step S514 that the value of the special figure process flag has become “0” (step S514; Yes), for example, the return effect waiting flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is turned on. It is determined whether or not (step S515). Here, the return effect flag is to return to the normal effect display based on the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal game after the execution of the special effect display based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special game is finished. Corresponding to the above, the on state is set in step S669 of FIG.

  If the return effect waiting flag is OFF in step S515 (step S515; No), a normal pattern change return pattern determination process is executed (step S516). 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing an example of the universal variation return pattern determination process executed in step S516. In this normal figure change return pattern determination process, the CPU 56 first determines the normal figure change return pattern as a use table for determining one of a plurality of normal figure change patterns when returning to the normal effect display. The table 134D is selected and set (step S651). Further, for example, by checking whether or not the flag for hitting the normal map is on, the normal map display result in the currently executed normal game is specified (step S652). Further, for example, by reading the normal figure fluctuation timer value which is a stored value in the normal figure fluctuation timer, the normal figure fluctuation remaining time T50 as the remaining time (remaining execution time) of the currently executed common figure game is specified. (Step S653).

  Following the processing in step S653, it is determined whether or not the normal map display result specified in step S652 is “normal map loss” (step S654). At this time, if the map display result is “map map loss” (step S654; Yes), it is determined whether or not the map map remaining time T50 specified in step S653 is within the range of 4000 ms to less than 31000 ms. Determination is made (step S655). Here, in the setting example of the normal map change return pattern determination table 134D shown in FIG. 23C, the normal map display result is “general map loss” and the normal map fluctuation remaining time T50 is within the range of 4000 ms to less than 31000 ms. In some cases, a pattern to be used is determined from the general map variation pattern PA1-1 to the general map variation pattern PA1-4, the general map variation pattern PA2-1, and the general map variation pattern PA2-2. At this time, when there are a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns shorter than the normal fluctuation remaining time T50, the pattern having the longest normal fluctuation time may be determined as the usage pattern.

  For this reason, when the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is within the range of 4000 ms or more and less than 31000 ms in step S655 (step S655; Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 8500 ms ( Step S656). If the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 8500 ms (step S656; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 4000 ms is determined as the usage pattern (see FIG. 24). Step S657). On the other hand, when the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is not less than 8500 ms (step S656; No), it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 13000 ms (step S658). If the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 13000 ms (step S658; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 85000 ms is determined as the usage pattern (see FIG. 24). Step S659).

  When the normal map remaining time T50 is not less than 13000 ms in step S658 (step S658; No), it is determined whether or not the normal map remaining time T50 is less than 17500 ms (step S660). At this time, if the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 17500 ms (step S660; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 13000 ms is determined as the usage pattern. (Step S661). On the other hand, when the normal change remaining time T50 is not less than 17500 ms (step S660; No), it is determined whether or not the normal change remaining time T50 is less than 19000 ms (step S662). If the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 19000 ms (step S662; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 17500 ms is determined as the usage pattern (see FIG. 24). Step S663).

  When the normal map remaining time T50 is not less than 19000 ms in step S662 (step S662; No), it is determined whether or not the normal map remaining time T50 is less than 25000 ms (step S664). At this time, if the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 25000 ms (step S664; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 19000 ms is determined as the usage pattern. (Step S665). Further, when the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is not less than 25000 ms (step S664; No), the normal fluctuation fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (see FIG. 24) in which the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is 25000 ms is determined as the usage pattern. (Step S666).

  When it is determined in step S655 that the normal map remaining time T50 is not within the range of not less than 4000 ms and less than 31000 ms (step S655; No), etc., based on the normal map remaining time T50 specified in step S653. Then, by referring to the normal figure change return pattern determination table 134D set in step S651, the normal figure change pattern corresponding to the normal figure change remaining time T50 is determined (step S667). In this case, it is possible to determine, as a usage pattern, one general pattern variation pattern associated with the general diagram variation remaining time T50 in the general diagram variation return pattern determination table 134D.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S657, S659, S661, S663, S665, S666, etc., the normal map change time T51 corresponding to the determined normal map change pattern is set, for example, in a predetermined area (game control) of the RAM 55. The data is stored in a normal time variable buffer of the buffer setting unit 155 (step S668). After that, the return effect flag is set to the on state (step S669), and the normal pattern change return pattern determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S654 that it is not “normal map loss” (step S654; No), whether the normal map fluctuation remaining time T50 specified in step S653 is within the range of 16500 ms or more and less than 36000 ms. Is determined (step S670 in FIG. 57). Here, in the setting example of the pattern change table 134D at the time of return to normal change shown in FIG. 23C, the result of the normal map display is “per standard map” such as “per first map” or “per second map”. When the normal map fluctuation remaining time T50 is within the range of 16500 ms or more and less than 36000 ms, the general map fluctuation pattern PA4-2, the general map fluctuation pattern PA4-3, the general map fluctuation pattern PA3-1, and the general map fluctuation pattern PA3- Of the two, a pattern to be used is determined. At this time, when there are a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns shorter than the normal fluctuation remaining time T50, the pattern having the longest normal fluctuation time may be determined as the usage pattern.

  Therefore, when the normal variation remaining time T50 is within the range of 16500 ms or more and less than 36000 ms in step S670 (step S670; Yes), it is determined whether or not this ordinary variation remaining time T50 is less than 19000 ms ( Step S671). If the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 19000 ms (step S671; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA4-3 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 10000 ms is determined as the usage pattern (see FIG. 24). Step S672). On the other hand, when the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is not less than 19000 ms (step S671; No), it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 25000 ms (step S673). If the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 25000 ms (step S673; Yes), the normal fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (see FIG. 24) having the normal fluctuation time of 19000 ms is determined as the usage pattern (see FIG. 24). Step S674).

  If the normal map remaining time T50 is not less than 25000 ms in step S673 (step S673; No), it is determined whether the normal map remaining time T50 is less than 31000 ms (step S675). At this time, if the usual figure fluctuation remaining time T50 is less than 31000 ms (step S675; Yes), the usual figure fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (see FIG. 24) having the usual figure fluctuation time of 25000 ms is determined as the usage pattern. (Step S676). On the other hand, when the normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is not less than 31000 ms (step S675; No), the normal fluctuation pattern PA4-2 (see FIG. 24) in which the normal fluctuation time is 31000 ms is determined as the usage pattern. (Step S677).

  When it is determined in step S670 that the normal map remaining time T50 is not within the range of 16500 or more and less than 36000 ms (step S670; No), the process proceeds to step S667 in FIG. 56 and the normal map change set in step S651. By referring to the return pattern determination table 134D, it is only necessary to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal map fluctuation remaining time T50. In addition, after executing any of the processes of steps S672, S674, S676, and S677, the process proceeds to step S668 of FIG. 56, and the base map change time T51 corresponding to the determined base map change pattern is stored. Good. In addition, not only when it is determined in step S654 in FIG. 56 that the general map display result is “normal map loss”, but the game state is the normal state and the general map display result is “per 1st general map”. Even when it is determined that the normal map variation pattern is determined based on the same setting as when the normal map display result is “normal map loss”, such as by proceeding to the processing of step S655. Good.

  When the return effect waiting flag is ON in step S515 in FIG. 55 (step S515; Yes), for example, by reading the stored value of the normal fluctuation timer, the current normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is specified. (Step S517). Then, after executing the map change return time pattern determination process in step S516 or after specifying the map change remaining time T50 in step S517, the map specified in step S517 or step S653 in FIG. 56 is used. It is determined whether or not the figure fluctuation remaining time T50 coincides with the common figure fluctuation time T51 in the normal figure fluctuation pattern determined in the normal figure fluctuation return pattern determination processing in step S516 (step S518). At this time, if the normal symbol fluctuation remaining time T50 and the normal symbol fluctuation time T51 do not match (step S518; No), the normal symbol fluctuation processing is terminated and the process waits until these times match.

  When the normal map change time T50 and the normal map change time T51 coincide with each other in step S518 (step S518; Yes), a setting for starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the normal effect display is performed. That is, the CPU 56 performs settings for transmitting a general map display result notification command corresponding to a general map display result in the currently executed general map game (step S519), and a normal map change return pattern in step S516. Settings are made to transmit a general-purpose variation pattern designation command corresponding to the general-purpose variation pattern determined by the determination process (step S520). At this time, the return effect flag is cleared and turned off (step S521), and the normal symbol variation effect invalid flag is cleared and turned off (step S522), and then the normal symbol variation process is terminated. . If it is determined in step S514 that the value of the special figure process flag is “0”, the normal figure is not waited until the normal figure change remaining time T50 and the normal figure change time T51 coincide with each other. Settings may be made so as to transmit a display result notification command and a common map change pattern designation command. In this case, for example, an effect control command for notifying the normal change remaining time T50 may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 together with the normal figure change pattern designation command. Then, after receiving the ordinary drawing display result notification command, the ordinary figure variation pattern designation command, etc. on the side of the effect control board 80, the remaining of the ordinary figure game is based on the ordinary figure fluctuation remaining time T50 notified from the main board 31. It is determined whether or not the time coincides with the usual figure fluctuation time T51 of the usual figure fluctuation pattern indicated in the usual figure fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the production operation based on the usual pattern variation pattern may be started at the timing when both times coincide with each other. On the other hand, in the period until the remaining time of the normal game matches the normal time fluctuation time T51 of the normal time fluctuation pattern, the effect operation becomes a predetermined special effect display such as a small hit end effect or a big hit end effect. May be executed continuously. At this time, when an effect operation that becomes a predetermined special effect display is executed to the end, for example, a predetermined special effect display such as a small hit end effect or a big hit end effect that has already been executed is returned to the beginning and repeatedly executed. You may do it. Alternatively, for example, the final effect operation in a predetermined special effect display such as the final effect image at the end of the big hit or the final effect image at the end of the big hit is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 continuously. It may be.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S143 of FIG. 52 as the normal symbol stop processing. In the normal symbol stop process shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the universal symbol fixed display flag is on (step S531). Here, the universal map fixed display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S535 described later, corresponding to the fact that the fixed normal symbol that is the general map display result in the general game is derived and displayed.

  When the normal figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S531 (step S531; No), for example, among the normal symbol display control data stored in the ROM 54, the control data corresponding to the fixed normal symbol is read and set. The setting for deriving and displaying the fixed normal symbol is performed (step S532). At this time, a setting for transmitting the universal map confirmation command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S533). In addition, a time map display time is set (step S534). Then, after the normal symbol fixed display flag is set to the on state (step S535), the normal symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the fixed normal symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S532, the normal symbol process processing corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the normal symbol fixed display time set in step S534 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, in step S531, it is determined that the flag for displaying a normal map is on.

  In step S531, when the normal figure fixed display flag is ON (step S531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fixed display time has elapsed (step S536). At this time, if the normal symbol fixed display time has not elapsed (step S536; No), the normal symbol stop process is ended, and the normal symbol fixed display time is awaited. When the universal map fixed display time has elapsed in step S536 (step S536; Yes), the universal map fixed display flag is cleared and turned off (step S537), and then the universal map hit flag is turned on. Is determined (step S538).

  If the flag for the normal map is on in step S538 (step S538; Yes), it is determined whether the result of the normal map display in the general game is “per first map” or “per second map”. It identifies (step S539). Further, for example, by checking whether or not the advantageous state flag is ON, it is specified whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the advantageous state (step S540). Then, based on the specified ordinary map display result and the gaming state, the start winning opening operation control pattern is selected from a plurality of types by referring to the starting port opening pattern setting table 136 (step S541). After the start winning / release releasing operation control pattern is selected in this way, the pre-start winning / releasing process in step S114 and the post-start winning / release process in step S145 shown in FIG. The start winning opening can be returned to the closed state after being opened for a time corresponding to the above. For example, when the game state is the normal state and the normal game display result is “per 1st normal game”, the start winning opening / releasing operation control pattern CSA is selected as the use pattern, and the start winning opening is set to the open state for 100 ms. Can be returned to the closed state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the advantageous state and the base map display result is “per 1st base figure”, or regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the advantageous state, the base map display result is “ In the case of “per second map”, the start winning opening operation control pattern CSB is selected as the use pattern, and the starting winning opening can be opened for 4000 ms and then returned to the closed state. After the process of step S541 is executed, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-start prize release process (step S542), and the normal symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the flag for the normal map is off in step S538 (step S538; No), the value of the general map process flag is set to “normal” in response to the result of the normal map display in the normal game being “usually lost”. After updating to “0” corresponding to the symbol normal process (step S543), the normal symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S21 of FIG. 36 as the movable member initial position control process. In the movable member initial position setting process shown in FIG. 59, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not an initial position control flag indicating that the operation of returning the movable member 77 to the initial position is on (step S161). ). At this time, if the initial position control flag is off (step S161; No), it is determined whether or not the upper position sensor 91a is on by checking a detection signal transmitted from the upper position sensor 91a. (Step S162). If the upper position sensor 91a is on (step S162; Yes), the movable member initial position control process is terminated.

  When the upper position sensor 91a is off in step S162 (step S162; No), it is determined whether or not the movable member lowering stop time has elapsed (step S163). At this time, if the movable member lowering stop time has not elapsed (step S163; No), the movable member initial position control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the movable member lowering stop time has elapsed in step S163 (step S163; Yes), the setting for starting the operation of driving the movable member drive motor 77B to return the movable member 77 to the initial position is performed. This is performed (step S164). Further, the initial position control in-progress flag is set to the on state (step S165).

  When the initial position control in-progress flag is turned on in step S161 (step S161; Yes), after the process of step S165 is executed, it is determined whether the upper position sensor 91a is turned on (step S166). . At this time, if the upper position sensor 91a is off (step S166; No), the movable member initial position control process is terminated, and control is performed to continue the operation of returning the movable member 77 to the initial position. On the other hand, when the upper position sensor 91a is on in step S166 (step S166; Yes), the setting for stopping the operation of the movable member 77 by stopping the drive of the movable member drive motor 77B is performed (step S166: Yes). Step S167). Then, after the initial position control in-progress flag is cleared and turned off (step S168), the movable member initial position control process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 80 will be described. In the effect control board 80, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 60 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S601), clears the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100, and sets various initial values. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 80 is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S602). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S602; No), the process of step S602 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the side of the production control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, for example, among the input ports 103a shown in FIG. 14, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 177. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S602 (step S602; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S603), and command analysis processing is executed (step S604). In the command analysis process executed in step S604, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S604, an effect control process is executed (step S605). In this effect control process, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9, an audio output operation from the speaker 27, and a lighting operation in a light emitting member such as the ceiling lamp 28a are used. With respect to the control content of the effect operation, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 are performed.

  Following the effect control process in step S605, an effect random number update process is executed (step S606), and various random number values used for effect control include an effect control counter setting unit 193 in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100, and the like. The numerical data indicating the random number value counted by the random counter provided in is updated by software. Then, after executing the decorative member initial position control process (step S607), the process returns to the process of step S602. In the decorative member initial position control process in step S607, setting for returning the arrangement of the decorative member 78 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the initial position is performed.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S605 of FIG. 60 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 selects and executes one of the following steps S700 to S710 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. To do.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S700 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, “left” and “left” provided in the display area of the effect display device 9 according to whether or not a general variation variation designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received. This includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the middle and right variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R. At this time, if it is determined to start variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S701 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, in response to the start of the general symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 10, the normal symbol variation pattern is performed in order to perform various effects including variable display of decorative symbols. Determine the final decorative design, temporary stop design, presence / absence of notice effect, notice pattern, etc., which will be the final stop pattern according to the normal figure display result, and multiple types of effect control patterns prepared in advance according to the decision result A process for selecting and setting one of the above as a usage pattern is performed. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S702 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, for example, various types of effect control patterns that are used patterns corresponding to the effect control process timer values that are stored in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. The control data is read out, and various kinds of effect control during the variable display of the decorative design are performed. For example, in response to the fact that the production control process timer value has reached a predetermined variable display end value (for example, “0”) or the reception of the common figure confirmation command transmitted from the main board 31, A final decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state. If the definite decorative design is displayed in full stop in response to the production control process timer value becoming the variable display end value, the normal map change time in the normal map change pattern specified by the normal map change pattern specification command Can be determined and the variable display result can be determined by deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern autonomously on the side of the effect control board 80 without using the effect control command from the main board 31. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S703 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the decorative symbol variation end process, the value of the effect process flag is updated in accordance with the general graphic display result indicated in the general graphic display result notification command transmitted from the main board 31. For example, when the normal map display result is “normal map loss”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0”, while the general map display result is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”. The value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” when “per standard”.

  The post-hit effect process in step S704 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the post-hit effect processing, the special action using the special symbol by the special symbol display 8 or the processing for controlling the production operation for notifying that the universal symbol display result is “per-normal”. In response to the start of the game, in order to perform various effect operations including the display of effect images in the special effect display, a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance according to special figure fluctuation patterns and special figure display results This includes processing for selecting and setting any of the above as a usage pattern. Even if the normal map display result is “per normal map”, the start opening time is as short as 100 ms when the game state is normal and the per normal map type is “per first general map”. Since it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the mouth, the rendering operation for notifying that “the hit is normal” may not be executed. In addition, in the post-hit effect processing, if the game ball does not enter the start winning opening that has become open based on the “Hong Kong” display result, the special game is executed. The value of the production process flag is updated in accordance with the special figure display result in the case where it is performed. For example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” when a predetermined time elapses without detecting a game ball that has entered (start winning prize) in the open start winning opening. When the special figure game is executed, when the special figure display result is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, while when the special figure display result is “big hit”. The value of the production process flag is updated to “8”.

  The small hitting effect setting process in step S705 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This small hit effect setting process includes a process for setting various kinds of effect control in the small hit game state based on the result that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The small hitting effect process in step S706 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This small hit effect processing includes processing for executing various effect controls in the small hit gaming state. Here, the control for changing the arrangement of the decorative member 78 in conjunction with the movable member 77 when the game ball is stopped by the second storage unit in the small hit game state is executed in the small hit effect processing. Will be. The after-hit effect process in step S707 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This after-hit effect processing includes processing for executing various effects control at the end of the small-hit gaming state. At this time, if the big hit notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “8” based on the occurrence of the V winning, and if the small hit end command is received, the V winning is not generated and the small hit is made. The value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in accordance with the end of the gaming state.

  The big hit effect setting process in step S708 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “8”. This big hit time effect setting process includes a process for making settings for starting various kinds of effect control in the big hit game state. The big hit effect process in step S709 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “9”. This jackpot effect process includes a process of executing various effect controls in the jackpot game state. The big hit effect processing in step S710 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “10”. This post-hit effect processing includes processing for executing various types of effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, the same time as the time before the jackpot end) after receiving the jackpot end command.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S701 of FIG. 61 as the decorative symbol variation setting processing. In the decorative symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the EXT data of the typical variation variation designation command transmitted from the main board 31, for example, so that the regular variation variation pattern is non-reach variation. It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (step S801).

  If the non-reach variation pattern is determined in step S801 (step S801; Yes), a final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S802). As an example, in the process of step S802, first, a random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is shown from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Extract numerical data. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, for example, by referring to the left final stop symbol determination table stored in advance in the effect control ROM or the like, the “left” variable display portion 9L The fixed decorative symbol to be derived and displayed is determined. Here, in the left final stop symbol determination table, the random number SR1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the final symbol that is derived and displayed in the “left” variable display portion 9L. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with −1 may be assigned. Subsequently, from the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, numerical data indicating the second final stop symbol determining random value SR1-2 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-2, for example, by referring to the right final stop symbol determination table stored in advance in the effect control ROM or the like, the “right” variable display portion 9R The fixed decorative symbol to be derived and displayed is determined. Here, in the right final stop symbol determination table, the random number SR1 for determining the second final stop symbol is used for the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the final symbol that is derived and displayed in the “right” variable display portion 9R. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with -2 only needs to be assigned. Then, the symbol number of the confirmed decorative symbol in the “right” variable display portion 9R is different from the symbol number of the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” variable display portion 9L due to assignment of the determined value in the right final stop symbol determining table. What is necessary is just to be determined. Further, numerical data indicating the third final stop symbol determining random number SR1-3 is extracted from the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-3, it is derived in the “medium” variable display section 9C by referring to the middle final stop symbol determination table stored in advance in the production control ROM or the like. Determine the final decorative pattern to be displayed. Here, in the middle final stop symbol determination table, the random number SR1 for determining the third final stop symbol for the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the final symbol that is derived and displayed by the variable display portion 9C of “medium”. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with -3.

  When the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern in step S801 (step S801; No), the same symbol determination table 140A is selected in response to at least setting the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol to “Left” and “ It is set as a use table for determining the same fixed decorative symbols that are derived and displayed together on the “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R (step S803). Also, numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random value SR1-1 is extracted from the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S804). . Then, based on the random number SR1-1 extracted in step S804, by referring to the same symbol determination table 140A set in step S803, etc. A fixed decorative symbol that is the same symbol that is derived and displayed on the left and right variable display portions 9L and 9R is determined (step S805). At this time, it is determined whether or not the reach effect mode corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern is a loss effect (step S806).

  When the effect is a loss effect in step S806 (step S806; Yes), the symbol difference determination table 140B is selected as a use table for determining the fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed in the “medium” variable display portion 9C. Is set (step S807). Also, numerical data indicating the second final stop symbol determining random value SR1-2 is extracted from the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S808). . Then, based on the random number value SR1-2 extracted in step S808, by referring to the symbol difference determination table 140B set in step S807, the “medium” variable can be changed at a different rate according to the normal pattern variation pattern. Specify and identify the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the confirmed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the display unit 9C and the symbol number of the fixed decorative symbol on the left and right variable display portions 9L and 9R As a middle symbol corresponding to the symbol difference, a fixed decorative symbol in the “medium” variable display portion 9C is determined (step S809). If it is determined in step S806 that it is not a lost effect but a winning effect, the determined decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R determined in step S805 are “middle”. What is necessary is just to determine so that it may become a definite decorative design in the variable display part 9C.

  Here, when the determined decorative symbol is not a specific combination but a reach combination, the determined decorative symbol may be determined using a reach symbol determining table different from the same symbol determining table 140A. . In this case, after it is determined in step S801 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, whether or not the reach production mode corresponding to the normal variation pattern is a loss production, as in the process of step S806. Determine. At this time, if it is not a lost effect but a winning effect, the process of steps S803 to S805 is executed to determine a definite decorative symbol to be a specific combination. On the other hand, in the case of the loss effect, the numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted, and, for example, the effect control is performed based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1-1. For example, by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM for example, a fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R is determined. Subsequently, the process of steps S807 to S809 may be executed to determine the fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “medium” variable display portion 9C.

  After executing the process of step S802, when it is not a lost effect in step S806 (step S806; No), or after executing the process of step S809, the changing effect setting is performed (step S810). In this changing production setting, for example, whether or not to perform various production operations during variable display of decorative symbols, such as the presence or absence of the announcement production and the decision of the announcement pattern, and the contents of the production operation in the case of execution It is preferable that processing for setting is performed. Subsequent to the setting in step S810, for example, an effect control pattern used for controlling various effect operations, such as an effect control pattern at the time of change in the normal map corresponding to the normal pattern change pattern specified by the normal pattern change pattern specifying command. Determine (step S811).

  Following the processing in step S811, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set in accordance with the normal time change time in the normal time change pattern (step S812). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the ordinary control variation production control pattern determined in step S811 to the VDP 109, the display area of the effect display device 9 is provided with “ Settings for starting the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 9 such as starting the variation of the decorative symbols at the variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ( Step S813). At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the process during the decorative symbol variation (step S814), and then the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S702 of FIG. 61 as the decorative symbol variation processing. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 101 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction, for example) (step S821) and then displays the updated effect control process timer value. Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S822).

  If it matches the timer determination value in step S822 (step S822; Yes), various data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The production control execution data such as the operation detection control data or either the end code is read (step S823). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S822 match the effect control process timer value, a plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S823. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S823 is an end code (step S824). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S824; No), effect control based on the effect control execution data read in step S823 is performed (step S825). As an example, if the presentation control execution data read in step S823 is display control data, a corresponding display control command is created and transmitted to the VDP 109. If the production control execution data is audio control data, corresponding sound number data is created and transmitted to the audio output board 70. If the production control execution data is lamp control data, a drive signal for the corresponding light emitting member is created and transmitted to the lamp driver board 35. If the production control execution data is operation detection control data, it is set whether or not the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 120 is set, or when the operation of the operation button 120 is detected during the operation valid period Various settings such as a setting for switching the production operation corresponding to the.

  When it does not coincide with the timer determination value in step S822 (step S822; No), after executing the process of step S825, for example, within a predetermined decorative member effect operation period corresponding to the usual pattern variation pattern or the like. It is determined whether or not there is (step S826). Here, the decoration member effect operation period is a period in which the effect operation using the decoration member 78 is executed, for example, when the effect operation is executed in a super reach reach effect mode such as Super S1 or Super S2. As long as it is specified by the production control execution data in the ordinary control variation production control pattern. If it is within the decoration member effect operation period in step S826 (step S826; Yes), the effect operation using the decoration member 78 is set (step S827). For example, in the process of step S827, after the decoration member drive motor 78B is driven for a predetermined time to change the arrangement of the decoration member 78, the decoration member drive motor 78B is driven in the reverse direction, etc. What is necessary is just to make it return to an initial position.

  When it is not within the decorative member effect operation period in step S826 (step S826; No), after executing the process of step S827, it is determined whether or not a normal map confirmation command has been received (step S828). At this time, if the universal figure confirmation command is not received (step S828; No), the decorative symbol changing process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step S824 that the code is an end code (step S824; Yes), or when a universal map confirmation command is received in step S828 (step S828; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is set. After updating to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of decorative symbol variation (step S829), the process during decorative symbol variation is terminated.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S704 shown in FIG. 61 as the post-hit effect processing. In the post-per-game effect processing shown in FIG. 64, the effect-controlling CPU 101 first displays “per-normal” such as “per-first map” or “per-second map” as the result of the normal-game display in the ordinary game. It is determined whether or not it is at the time of starting the notification per ordinary figure based on the fact (step S841). And if it is at the time of the start of notification per usual figure (step S841; Yes), it will be various effect control patterns CHE1 used for alert per common figure out of the various kinds of various effect control patterns as shown in FIG. Is selected and set (step S842). At this time, a predetermined time is set as the pre-start winning time (step S843).

  When it is not at the time of the start of notification per universal map in step S841 (step S841; No), it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S844). If a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is received (step S844; Yes), a special figure fluctuation production control pattern is determined corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern designated by the received command (step S845). ). At this time, the setting of the time before the start winning prize is cleared (step S846).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S843 and S846, after setting the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 based on the effect control pattern to be used, etc. (step S847). Then, after the normal hitting, the effect processing ends.

  If no special figure variation pattern designation command is received in step S844 (step S844; No), it is determined whether or not an effect end standby flag is on (step S848). The effect end standby flag here corresponds to the case where the data read from the various effect control patterns CHE1 used for executing the effect operation that is a notification per universal figure is an end code, or to the variable display of special symbols. When the data read from the effect control pattern used to execute the effect operation is an end code, it is set to the on state by the process of step S854 described later. When the production end standby flag is OFF in step S848 (step S848; No), the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) (step S849), and the updated production control process timer value is produced. Compared with the production control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S850).

  If it matches the timer determination value in step S850 (step S850; Yes), various data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, The effect control execution data such as the operation detection control data or the end code is read (step S851). Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S851 is an end code (step S852). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the end code (step S852; No), effect control based on the effect control execution data read in step S851 is performed (step S853). On the other hand, when the end code is read (step S853; Yes), the effect end standby flag is set to the on state (step S854).

  When the production end standby flag is on at step S848 (step S848; Yes), when it does not match the timer determination value at step S850 (step S850; No), or the processing of steps S853 and S854 is performed. After executing either one, it is determined whether or not a special figure confirmation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S855). At this time, if a special figure confirmation command is received (step S855; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result in the special figure game is “big hit” (step S856).

  When it is determined in step S856 that it is not “big hit” (step S856; No), based on the fact that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is set to the effect setting processing at the time of small hit. The corresponding value is updated to “5” (step S857). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S856 that the game is “big hit” (step S856; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “8” that is a value corresponding to the big hit time production setting process ( Step S858).

  When no special figure confirmation command is received in step S855 (step S855; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-start winning time has elapsed (step S859). In addition, what is necessary is just to make it always determine that the time before a start winning prize does not pass, when the setting of the time before a start winning prize is cleared in step S846. When the time before the start winning prize has not elapsed in step S846 (step S859; No), the next timer interruption is generated by ending the post-hit effect processing without updating the value of the effect process flag. Sometimes, the effect processing is executed after hitting the normal map. On the other hand, when the time before starting winning a prize has passed in step S859 (step S859; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start waiting process (step S859). S860). Thus, based on the fact that the normal map display result is “per normal map”, after performing the stage action such as the general map notification informing that the start prize opening is in an open state, the player enters the start prize opening ( When the pre-start winning time elapses without receiving the special figure variation pattern designation command because the passed game ball is not detected, the decorative symbol variable display is executed corresponding to the next ordinary game. Can be controlled.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S857, S858, and S860, after clearing the effect end standby flag to turn it off (step S861), the post-hit effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S706 of FIG. 61 as small hitting effect processing. In the small hit effect processing shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not an accessory release command has been received (step S871). At this time, if an accessory release command has been received (step S871; Yes), for example, various effect control patterns shown in FIG. 33C according to the result of reading the EXT data of the received accessory release command. Either CKE1-1 or various effect control patterns CKE1-2 is set as a usage pattern (step S872).

  Here, as the EXT data of the accessory release command, different data is set depending on whether or not the start operation is based on the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. Then, in the process of step S872, various effect control patterns different according to the EXT data are determined as usage patterns. For example, when the start operation is not based on the last special game that can be executed in the advantageous state, the various effect control patterns CKE1-1 prepared for executing the small hit effect during the normal time are used. Decide on a pattern. On the other hand, when the starting operation is based on the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state, various effect control patterns prepared for executing the small hit effect during the final advantageous state. CKE1-2 is determined as the usage pattern. Thereby, it is possible to cause a predetermined effect device to execute an effect operation that becomes a small hit effect in different effect modes depending on whether or not the start operation is based on the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. it can. In addition, depending on not only whether or not it is the last special game that can be executed in the advantageous state, but also depending on the number of continuation of the advantageous state, etc. May be. For example, in the process of step S872, various effect control patterns that differ depending on the number of continuations of the advantageous state indicated in the EXT data of the accessory release command may be set as usage patterns.

  After executing the process of step S872, after setting the initial value of the effect control process timer based on the various effect control patterns to be used (step S873), the small hitting effect process is terminated.

  If no accessory release command is received in step S871 (step S871; No), it is determined whether or not an effect end standby flag is on (step S874). The effect end standby flag here is set to the ON state by the process of step S880 described later when the data read from the effect control pattern used for executing the effect during the small hit is the end code. . When the production end standby flag is OFF in step S874 (step S874; No), the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) (step S875), and the updated production control process timer value is produced. Compared with the production control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S876).

  If it matches the timer determination value in step S876 (step S876; Yes), various data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The production control execution data such as the operation detection control data or the end code is read (step S877). Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S877 is an end code (step S878). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S878; No), effect control based on the effect control execution data read in step S877 is performed (step S879). On the other hand, when the end code is read (step S878; Yes), the effect end standby flag is set to the on state (step S880).

  When the production end standby flag is on in step S874 (step S874; Yes), when it does not match the timer determination value in step S876 (step S876; No), or in the processing of steps S879 and S880. After executing either one, it is determined whether or not a discharge completion detection command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S881). At this time, if the discharge completion detection command is not received (step S881; No), the small hitting medium effect process is terminated and the process waits until the discharge completion detection command is received. Note that, during the period until the discharge completion detection command is received, when the effect operation that is the small hit effect is executed to the end, the small hit effect may be returned to the beginning and repeatedly executed. Alternatively, for example, the final effect operation in the small hit effect may be continuously executed, such as, for example, the final effect image in the small hit effect is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  When the discharge completion detection command is received in step S881 (step S881; Yes), for example, a post-discharge completion effect setting flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to an on state (step S882). At this time, the production end standby flag is cleared and turned off (step S883). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “7” which is a value corresponding to the effect process after the small hit (step S884), the effect process during the small hit is ended.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S707 of FIG. 61 as the after-hit effect processing. In the after-hit effect processing shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the after-completion effect setting flag is on (step S891). At this time, if the post-discharge completion effect setting flag is on (step S891; Yes), the post-discharge completion effect setting flag is cleared and set to an off state (step S892).

  Following the processing in step S892, it is determined whether an advantageous state end notification command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S892). At this time, if the advantageous state end notification command has been received (step S892; Yes), the advantageous state final V-winning is supported from among a plurality of types of various effect control patterns as shown in FIG. The various effect control patterns CKE2-3 used for the effect at the end of the small hit are selected and set (step S894). As a result, the effect operation for notifying that the advantageous state is ended because the V winning is not generated in the small hit game state based on the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state as an effect at the end of the small hit. And can be executed by a predetermined effect device. Further, depending on the number of continuations of the advantageous state, etc., the effect mode in the small hitting end effect that notifies that the advantageous state ends may be varied. For example, in the process of step S894, various effect control patterns that differ depending on the number of continuations of the advantageous state indicated in the EXT data of the advantageous state end notification command may be set as usage patterns.

  When no advantageous state end notification command is received in step S893 (step S893; No), it is determined whether or not a V winning detection command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S895). At this time, if the V winning detection command is received (step S895; Yes), the small hit corresponding to the normal V winning is selected from the various types of various effect control patterns as shown in FIG. Various production control patterns CKE2-2 used for production at the end are selected and set (step S896). On the other hand, when no V winning detection command is received in step S895 (step S895; No), various effect control patterns CKE2-1 used for the end-of-hit end effect corresponding to no normal V winning are selected. And set (step S897).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S894, S896, and S897, after setting the initial value of the effect control process timer based on various effect control patterns to be used (step S898), the after-hit effect process is performed. finish.

  If the post-discharge completion after-effect setting flag is off in step S891 (step S891; No), it is determined whether or not the effect end standby flag is on (step S899). The effect end waiting flag here is set to the on state by the process of step S905 described later when the data read from the effect control pattern used for executing the effect at the end of the small hit is an end code. The When the production end standby flag is off in step S899 (step S899; No), the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) (step S900), and the updated production control process timer value is produced. Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values (step S901).

  If it matches the timer determination value in step S901 (step S901; Yes), various data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The production control execution data such as the operation detection control data or the end code) is read (step S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S902 is an end code (step S903). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S903; No), effect control based on the effect control execution data read in step S902 is performed (step S904). On the other hand, when the end code is read (step S903; Yes), the effect end standby flag is set to the on state (step S905).

  When the production end standby flag is on in step S899 (step S899; Yes), when it does not match the timer determination value in step S901 (step S901; No), or in the processing of steps S904 and S905 After either of them is executed, it is determined whether or not a universal variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S906). At this time, if there is a universal pattern change pattern designation command received (step S906; Yes), following the small hit end effect included in the special effect display executed based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. The value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the decoration pattern variation setting process in order to execute the variable display of the decoration pattern included in the normal effect display executed based on the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal game. It is updated to “1” (step S907).

  When there is no reception of the usual map change pattern designation command in step S906 (step S906; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot notification command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S908). At this time, if the jackpot notification command is received (step S908; Yes), the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 opened by the start operation enters the specific winning port 66A that is a specific area ( Corresponding to the start of control to the big hit gaming state due to V winning), the value of the production process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the big hit time effect setting process (step S909).

  When no big hit notification command is received in step S908 (step S908; No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S910). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration display command is received (step S910; Yes), when the effect at the end of the small hit included in the special effect display executed based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game is completed. In response to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal game is not executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start waiting process (step S911). .

  When no customer waiting demonstration display command is received in step S910 (step S910; No), the after-hit effect processing is terminated. In addition, after executing any of the processes of steps S907, S909, and S911, the effect end standby flag is cleared and turned off (step S912), and then the after-hit effect process is ended. Even when it is determined in step S899 that the effect end standby flag is on, the effect operation that is the effect at the end of the small hits may be continuously executed until the process of step S912 is executed. . At this time, when the effect operation that is the predetermined effect at the end of the small hit is executed to the end, the effect at the end of the small hit may be returned to the beginning and repeatedly executed. Alternatively, for example, the final effect operation in the effect at the end of the small hit may be continuously executed, for example, the final effect image in the effect at the end of the small hit is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. .

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the game proceeds as schematically shown in FIG. Then, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device to the game area 7 passes through the gate 32 as the normal start area and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a (step S131 in FIG. 52; Yes). The normal symbol starting condition for executing the general symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10 is established. At this time, for example, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the general chart display result extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, etc. (step S134), It is determined whether or not the display result is “per common map” such as “per first map” or “per second map” (step S465 in FIG. 53). Then, based on the determination contents of the general map display result, the general pattern variation pattern is determined (step S493 in FIG. 54), and the special effect display based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special game is executed, for example. On the condition that there is not (or unconditionally), a setting is made to transmit a universal pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined general map change pattern (step S495).

  Here, when determining the normal fluctuation pattern, for example, the normal fluctuation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 22, the reach fluctuation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 23 (A), and FIG. 23 (B). By referring to any of the non-reach variation pattern determination table 134C shown in FIG. 6B, the determination result as to whether or not the normal figure display result is “per normal figure”, and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is set as the reach state. The normal variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns at a different rate depending on the determination result of whether or not to perform. For example, as shown in FIG. 24, each ordinary pattern variation pattern executes an effect operation such as a reach effect during variable display of decorative symbols in different effect modes. By determining the normal map variation pattern in this way, it is possible to determine the reach effect mode as one of a plurality of types at different rates depending on the determination result of whether or not the normal map display result is "per standard map". it can.

  In the effect control board 80, a setting for starting variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to the reception of the universal pattern change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the same symbol determination table 140A set as shown in FIG. 32A, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state according to the normal symbol variation pattern. As a result, the determined decorative symbols that are the same symbols that are derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9C are determined at different ratios depending on the reach effect mode (FIG. 62). Step S805).

  FIG. 67 shows an effect in the case where decorative display variable display is executed in response to the designation of the universal pattern variation pattern PA1-1, the universal diagram variation pattern PA2-1, the universal diagram variation pattern PA3-1, and the like. The example of a display operation in the display apparatus 9 is shown. Here, in the case where the reach effect mode in the variable display of the decorative symbols is normal N1 corresponding to the normal diagram variation pattern PA2-1 or the universal diagram variation pattern PA3-1, it corresponds to another general diagram variation pattern. Compared to the case where the reach effect is achieved, the variable number of “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, which is an even symbol number, is displayed as a variable display portion for “left” and “right”. The ratio determined as the fixed decorative symbol that is derived and displayed at 9L and 9R increases. In the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to these normal pattern variation patterns, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the decorative display is performed on the variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. After the symbol starts to change, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed on the “left” variable display portion 9L. In the example shown in FIG. 67B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” corresponding to the symbol number “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the variable display portion 9L “left”. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed.

  After that, for example, in the case of “non-reach” in which the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern PA1-1, for example, as shown in FIG. The player can recognize that it is “non-reach” by stopping and displaying the decorative design different from the confirmed decorative design in the variable display portion 9L on the “right” variable display portion 9R. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the fixed decorative design that is a non-reach combination is derived and displayed when the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed in the variable display portion 9C of “medium”, and the decorative design of the decorative design is displayed. Variable display ends. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern such as the normal variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol determined in step S802 shown in FIG. 60 is the decorative symbol. The display results in the variable display may be derived and displayed sequentially (or simultaneously).

  Further, for example, in the case of “reach” where the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state corresponding to the normal diagram variation pattern PA2-1, the general diagram variation pattern PA3-1, etc., for example, FIG. As shown in the figure, the player can recognize that “reach” has been achieved by stopping and displaying the same decorative design as the fixed decorative design in the “left” variable display portion 9L on the “right” variable display portion 9R. Let Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the effect display in the reach effect mode of normal N1 is performed, such as decelerating the variation speed of the decorative symbol in the “medium” variable display portion 9C. Subsequently, for example, in the case where a loss effect is performed in which the decorative symbol variable display result is a reach combination other than the specific combination corresponding to the general pattern variation pattern PA2-1, as shown in FIG. 67 (G1). In addition, a display combination other than the specific combination is obtained by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols different from the fixed decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R on the “middle” variable display portion 9C. The finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol ends. On the other hand, for example, in the case where a winning effect is performed in which the decorative symbol variable display result is a specific combination corresponding to the general pattern variation pattern PA3-1, as shown in FIG. 67 (G2), By displaying the same decorative symbols as the fixed decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R on the “middle” variable display portion 9C, a fixed decorative symbol that is a specific combination is derived and displayed. Thus, the variable display of the decorative design is completed.

  FIG. 68 shows an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in response to the designation of the normal variation pattern PA2-4, the universal variation pattern PA3-4, and the like. Show. Here, in the case where the reach effect mode in the variable display of the decorative symbol is Super S2 corresponding to the general map variation pattern PA2-4 or the general diagram variation pattern PA3-4, it corresponds to the other general diagram variation pattern. Compared to the case where the reach effect mode is set, any one of the decorative symbols having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” is displayed on the variable display portions “left” and “right”. The ratio determined as the fixed decorative symbol that is derived and displayed at 9L and 9R increases. Even in the variable display of decorative patterns corresponding to these normal pattern variation patterns, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the decorative displays are made on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R. After the symbols start to fluctuate, it is only necessary that the fixed decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the “left” variable display portion 9L as shown in FIG. 68 (B). In the example shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” corresponding to the symbol number “7” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” variable display portion 9L.

  Thereafter, for example, in the case of “reach” in which the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state corresponding to the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA2-4, the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern PA3-4, etc., for example, FIG. As shown in the figure, the player can recognize that “reach” has been achieved by stopping and displaying the same decorative design as the fixed decorative design in the “left” variable display portion 9L on the “right” variable display portion 9R. Let Then, for example, an effect display in the reach effect mode of the super S2 is performed such as displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 68 (D). Subsequently, for example, in the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is a reach combination other than the specific combination corresponding to the general pattern variation pattern PA2-4, a loss effect as shown in FIG. 64 (E1) is executed. At the same time, a decorative symbol different from the fixed decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R is stopped and displayed on the “medium” variable display portion 9C. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (F1), a definite decorative symbol that is a reach combination other than the specific combination is derived and displayed, and the decorative symbol variable display ends. On the other hand, for example, in the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is a specific combination corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern PA3-4, a hit effect as shown in FIG. 68 (E2) is executed. , The same decorative symbols as the fixed decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” variable display portions 9L and 9R are stopped and displayed on the “medium” variable display portion 9C. In this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (F2), the fixed decorative pattern that is a specific combination is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative graphic is completed.

  When the normal map display result in the general game is “per 1st general map” or “per 2nd general map”, for example, a start opening pattern setting as shown in FIG. By referring to the table 136, etc., a start winning release operation control pattern corresponding to the gaming state and the usual game display result is selected (step S541). The game ball cannot enter the start winning opening as a special start area formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 by driving control of the movable part solenoid 62 based on the start winning release operation control pattern selected at this time. It changes from a closed state to an open state in which a game ball can enter. Thereafter, when the start opening time elapses, the start winning opening is returned to the closed state (steps S144 and S145 in FIG. 52). When a game ball enters (passes) the start winning opening that has become open, the game ball is detected by the start port switch 60 (step S201 in FIG. 38; Yes). At this time, the special symbol starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the special symbol by the special symbol display 8 is established. Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S203), the special figure display in the special figure game is performed. Whether the result is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (step S204). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S205; Yes, and step S258 in FIG. 40; Yes), the big hit game is not made after the special figure game is over. Since it is controlled to the state (steps S259 to S268, etc.), whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 opened by the start operation has entered the specific winning opening 66A (V winning). Regardless of this, the opening / closing plate 16 executes a round in which the big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 69 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of operation control for executing a variable display of a special symbol and a start operation in the small hit gaming state when the special figure display result is “small hit”. When it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S205 in FIG. 38; No), based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the small hit type (step S209), for example, By referring to the small hit type determination table 132 as shown in FIG. 20A, the small hit type or the small hit symbol is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S210). In addition, as the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR3 for determining the small hit type, numerical data indicating the same (common) random number value is used, and the special figure display result is expressed as “big hit”. ”Or“ small hit ”may be determined when the special figure display result is“ small hit ”. Settings for transmitting the special figure display result notification command are made according to the special figure display result and the small hit type determined in this way (step S218).

  Subsequently, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR6 for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern (step S232 in FIG. 39), for example, by referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 135 as shown in FIG. The special figure variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns according to the special figure display result (step S233). At this time, settings for transmitting a special figure variation pattern designation command according to the determined special figure variation pattern are performed (step S234). Also, a different special figure fluctuation time T01 (see FIG. 25B) is set according to the determined special figure fluctuation pattern (step S235). Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 69A, a special symbol display result notification command or a special diagram variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, etc. The special game using the special symbol by the device 8 is started (step S236).

  In the effect control board 80, based on the reception of the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31 (Step S844 in FIG. 64; Yes), the determination of the special figure fluctuation production control pattern (Step S845) is performed. The special effect display based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game is executed. When the execution of the special effect display is started, the processes of steps S700 to S703 shown in FIG. 61 are not executed until the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” (for example, step S860). Therefore, the special effect display is executed in preference to the normal effect display including the decorative symbol variable display based on the normal symbol variable display in the normal game. Note that even when the processing of steps S700 to S703 shown in FIG. 61 is being executed, the special symbols in the special game can be changed, for example, when a special graphic variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received. When the effect control command corresponding to the display is received, the special effect display may be executed with priority over the normal effect display by proceeding to processing according to the received effect control command. As an example, when it is determined in the command analysis process in step S604 shown in FIG. 60 that an effect control command corresponding to variable display of a special symbol in the special game is received, the value of the effect control process flag is “0” to “0”. If it is any of “3”, it is updated to a predetermined flag value in association with the received effect control command, and in response to the reception of the effect control command in the effect control process of step S605. What is necessary is just to advance to a process.

  When the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game reaches the special symbol fluctuation time T01 and the fixed special symbol that is the special graph display result is derived and displayed (step S252 in FIG. 40), Settings for transmitting the special figure confirmation command are performed (step S253). In addition, a fixed special figure fixed display time T02 is set (step S254). Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed in response to the transmission of the special figure confirmation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, the special figure is displayed. Until the confirmed display time T02 elapses (step S256; No), the confirmed special symbol is continuously displayed (determined display).

  When the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S258 in FIG. 40; No), for example, by referring to the pre-release time setting table 137 as shown in FIG. A different pre-opening time T03 is set according to the symbol number of the small hit symbol derived and displayed as (Step S285 in FIG. 41). For example, as shown in FIGS. 69 (A) and 69 (B), the pre-opening time T03 is small after a special figure confirmation display time T02 in which a special figure display result in the special figure game is confirmed and displayed. This is the time required until the opening / closing operation of the accessory entrance (the first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72) included in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is started by the starting operation in the winning game state. Therefore, the time T03 before releasing the accessory from when the small hit symbol that is the open display result is derived and displayed as the special graphic display result in the special figure game until the start of execution of the start operation in the small hit game state is determined. The time varies depending on the type of small hit symbol that has become a special symbol.

  When the start operation is executed in the small hit gaming state, for example, by referring to the accessory release pattern setting table 138 as shown in FIG. 29C, the accessory release operation control pattern corresponding to the small hit type is set. It is selected (step S305 in FIG. 42). At this time, the accessory release control time T20 corresponding to the selected accessory release operation control pattern is set (step S306). Thereafter, in response to the start of execution of the starting operation, setting for transmitting an accessory release command is performed (step S310). Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), when an accessory release command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, the accessory entrance of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened / closed by the starting operation. Starting, the game ball can enter (win) the variable winning ball apparatus 20. At this time, the opening solenoid 75 is driven by setting the opening solenoid output data (step S307 in FIG. 42, step S319 in FIG. 43), executing the solenoid output process (step S20 in FIG. 36), or the like. The first entrance 71 and the second entrance 72 are changed between the closed state and the open state by the open doors 76A and 76B.

  When the end code is read from the accessory release operation control pattern (step S320 in FIG. 43: Yes), a fixed accessory release time T21 is set (step S321), and an accessory close command is transmitted. Is set (step S322). Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), when the accessory close command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, the accessory release control time T20 elapses (step S311 in FIG. 42). Yes), the start-up operation is completed, the accessory entrance of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is returned to the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter (win) the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Until the time T21 after the bonus release has elapsed (step S324 in FIG. 44; No), the detection signals transmitted from the first bonus winning switch 71a and the second bonus winning switch 72a are checked (see FIG. 44). 42, steps S313 and S316), it is possible to detect a game ball that has entered (winned) into the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  In the operation control example shown in FIG. 69, the game ball does not enter the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the opening / closing operation of the accessory advance serving as the starting operation, and for example, shown in FIGS. 69 (C) and (D). As shown, no approaching ball is detected. That is, neither of the ON signals of the first prize winning switch 71a and the second prize winning switch 72a is detected, and the in-function game ball number count value is maintained at “0”. In this way, when the bonus release control time T20 and the bonus release time T21 have elapsed (step S311 in FIG. 42; Yes, and step S324 in FIG. 44: Yes), the game ball number count value in the bonus is “ If it is “0” (step S325; Yes), the processing of steps S328 to S342 is not executed, so neither the first storage unit nor the second storage unit is in an open state, and the arrangement of the movable member 77 is also changed. Never done. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “6” (step S327), and the post-discharge setting flag is on when the next timer interrupt occurs (step S354 in FIG. 46). ; Yes), a setting for transmitting the discharge completion detection command is made (step S356), and a post-discharge completion time T22 is set (step S357).

  Upon receiving the discharge completion detection command on the side of the effect control board 80 (step S881 in FIG. 65; Yes), the determination result as to whether or not the advantageous state end notification command has been received (step S893 in FIG. 66), V prize winning Depending on the determination result of whether or not a detection command has been received (step S895), one of the various effect control patterns CKE2-1 to various effect control patterns CKE2-3 is set as the usage pattern (steps S894, S896, and S897). ). Thereby, it is possible to cause a predetermined effect device to perform an effect operation that becomes an effect at the time of the end of a small hit, in an effect mode that varies depending on whether or not the V winning is completed and whether or not the advantageous state ends.

  When the time T22 after the discharge is completed (step S365 in FIG. 47; Yes), the first reservoir release flag is off (step S366; No), and the V winning flag is also off (step S369; No). ), A small hit end command transmission setting indicating that the small hit gaming state is ended without V winning (step S381).

  70 and 71 are timing charts showing an example of operation control when a game ball enters only the first entrance 71 in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 that has been opened by the starting operation. In the operation control examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, when the CPU 56 shifts to the small hit gaming state, the opening / closing operation of the accessory entrance is performed by driving the opening solenoid 75, etc., as in the operation control example of FIG. Is executed. Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 70B and 71B, when a game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 is detected by the first prize winning switch 71a (step S313 in FIG. 42; Yes). ) In response to the detection of the approaching ball, 1 is added to the in-game game ball count value (step S314).

  Thereafter, the game ball passes through the first path 900A inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and passes through a path member 92 provided on the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, as shown in FIGS. Once stored in the first storage unit. Then, when the bonus release control time T20 and the bonus release time T21 have elapsed (step S311 in FIG. 42; Yes, and step S324 in FIG. 44: Yes), the bonus ball count value in the bonus is “ Since it is not “0” (step S325; No), for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (E) and FIG. 71 (E), when the first reservoir pre-opening time T10 has passed (step S329; Yes), Release setting for releasing (releasing) the storage state (stop state) of game balls by one storage unit is performed (step S330). In this way, as shown in FIG. 9C, the game ball released from the first reservoir is guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 and wins the specific winning opening 66A through the specific side opening 66b, or The other side opening 84 is discharged.

  In the operation control example shown in FIG. 70, the game ball released from the first storage unit does not win the specific winning opening 66A (Step S345; No in FIG. 44), and enters the side opening 84 and is discharged. Here, for example, when the accessory discharge switch 85a detects a game ball as shown in FIG. 70 (H) without detecting the V prize as shown in FIG. 70 (D) (step S343; Yes), The in-thing game ball count value is decremented by 1 (step S344).

  In the operation control example shown in FIG. 71, the game ball released from the first storage unit wins the specific winning opening 66A, and for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 66a. V winning detection is detected (step S345 in FIG. 44; Yes). At this time, the V winning flag is set to the on state (step S346), and the setting for transmitting the V winning detection command is performed (step S347). Subsequently, when this game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a as shown in FIG. 71 (H) (step S343; Yes), the in-function game ball count value is decremented by 1 (step S344). ).

  Thus, when the game ball count value in the bonuses becomes “0” (step S335 in FIG. 44; Yes), the setting for transmitting the discharge completion detection command is performed (step S356 in FIG. 46), and the discharge is performed. A post-completion time T22 is set (step S357). When the time T22 after the discharge is completed (step S365 in FIG. 47; Yes), based on the fact that the first storage section release flag is on (step S366; Yes), for example, FIG. As shown to E), the closing setting which returns from the state which open | released (released) the 1st storage part to the storage state (stationary state) is performed (step S367).

  In the example of operation control shown in FIG. 70, since the V winning flag is OFF (step S369 in FIG. 47; No), transmission of a small hit end command indicating that the small hit gaming state is ended without V winning. Setting is performed (step S381). On the other hand, in the operation control example shown in FIG. 71, since the V winning flag is on (step S369; Yes), the setting for transmitting the big hit notification command is performed (step S371), and the big hit state starts. A waiting time is set (step S373). Thereafter, when the big hit state start waiting time elapses (step S392 in FIG. 48; Yes), setting for transmitting the big hit start command is performed (step S394), and the round start waiting time is set (step S395). . Further, when the round start waiting time has elapsed (step S396; Yes), for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the open solenoid 75 is driven from OFF to ON, and the big prize opening is closed by the opening / closing plate 16. Is changed to the open state, and the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state is started (step S399). At this time, settings for transmitting a round start command are performed (step S400).

  Here, the time T11 before opening the second reservoir and the time T12 before moving movable member add the time T10 before opening the first reservoir and the time required until the game ball released from the first reservoir is discharged. It may be set in advance so as to be longer than the set time. For example, when the time T10 before opening the first storage part is 14500 ms and the time required for the game ball released from the first storage part to be discharged is about 3000 ms to 5000 ms, the time before the second storage part opening. T11 may be set to 27000 ms, and the movable member lowering time T12 may be set to 22676 ms. In this case, it is determined that the game ball released from the first storage unit is discharged to the outside of the variable winning ball device 20 and the in-function game ball count value becomes “0” (step S325 in FIG. 44). Determination that the second reservoir pre-opening time T11 has not elapsed (No at Step S333) and determination that the movable member lowering time T12 has not elapsed (Yes at Step S341). No.) is made, so that the small hit gaming state is completed without releasing (releasing) the storage state (stopped state) in the second storage part and without changing the arrangement of the movable member 77. To do. In other words, if the game ball has not entered the second entrance 72 and is not detected by the second prize winning switch 72a, the second storage portion is not opened, and the movable member 77 is arranged. There is no change.

  FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing an example of operation control when a game ball enters both the first advance entrance 71 and the second advance entrance 72 in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 that is opened by the start operation. Also in the operation control example shown in FIG. 72, when the CPU 56 shifts to the small hit gaming state, the opening / closing operation of the accessory entry is performed by driving the opening solenoid 75 or the like, similarly to the operation control example in FIG. Let For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), when a game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 is detected by the second prize winning switch 72a (step S316 in FIG. 42; Yes), there is an entry ball detection. In response to this, 1 is added to the game ball count value in the bonus item (step S317). For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), when a game ball that has entered the first entrance 71 is detected by the first prize winning switch 71a (step S313; Yes), this means that there is an entry ball detected. Then, 1 is added to the game ball count value in the bonus item (step S314). In this way, the game ball count value in the accessory is “2”.

  Thereafter, the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 from the first entrance 71 passes through the first path 900A, and to the left of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 as shown in FIGS. It is temporarily stored in the first storage section through the provided path member 92. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 72 passes through the second path 900B inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and passes through the path member 94 as shown in FIG. It is induced | guided | derived to the upper right of 20 and is once stored by the 2nd storage part.

  Subsequently, when the bonus release control time T20 and the bonus release time T21 have elapsed (step S311 in FIG. 42; Yes, and step S324 in FIG. 44: Yes), the number of winning balls in the bonus is counted. Since it is not “0” (step S325; No), for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), when the first reservoir pre-opening time T10 has elapsed (step S329; Yes), the game by the first reservoir Release setting for releasing (releasing) the storage state (stop state) of the sphere is performed (step S330). As a result, as shown in FIG. 9C, the game ball released from the first reservoir is guided to the front side of the rotating body 86 and wins the specific winning opening 66A through the specific side opening 66b. Or, it enters the other side opening 84 and is discharged. In the operation control example shown in FIG. 72, the game ball released from the first storage part enters the side opening 84 and becomes disengaged. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), when a game ball passing through the first path 900A is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a (step S343 in FIG. 44; Yes), the game ball in the accessory The count value is decremented by 1 to “1” (step S344).

  In this case, the in-game game ball count value still does not become “0” (step S325 in FIG. 44; No). For example, as shown in FIG. When this is done (step S341; Yes), the movable member control process is executed to change the arrangement of the movable member 77 (step S342). In this way, as shown in FIG. 6, the left end portion of the movable member 77 is tilted downward most downward, so that the movable member 77 advances forward from the display area of the effect display device 9, and the movable member lowering stop time is set. (Step S558 in FIG. 45). Subsequently, before the movable member descending stop time elapses (step S163 in FIG. 59; No), for example, as shown in FIG. 72G, a second pre-opening time T11 elapses (FIG. 72G). 44, step S333; Yes), a release setting for releasing (releasing) the storage state (stop state) of the game balls by the second storage unit is performed (step S334). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10B, the game ball released from the second reservoir passes through the inside of the movable member 77 and the path member 95 and falls to the upper surface of the rotating body 86, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, a special winning opening 66A is won through the specific opening 66 or the specific side opening 66b, or the other side opening 84 is discharged.

  When the movable member descending stop time has elapsed after the left end portion of the movable member 77 has been lowered downward and inclined (step S163 in FIG. 59; Yes), for example, as shown in FIG. Setting is made to raise the movable member 77 to return to the original arrangement (step S164). For example, as shown in FIGS. 72D and 72H, when the game ball that has passed through the second path 900B is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a without winning the specific winning opening 66A (FIG. 72). 44, step S343; Yes), the in-function game ball count value is decremented by 1 to “0” (step S344). Thereafter, the small hit gaming state is completed in the same manner as the operation control example shown in FIG.

  The second reservoir pre-opening time T11 and the movable member descending time T12 are longer than the first reservoir pre-opening time T10, and further, for example, passed through a first path 900A as shown in FIG. 72 (H). It is set in advance so as to be longer than the first required discharge time T1H, which is the required time until the game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. For example, if the time T10 before opening the first storage unit is 14500 ms and the required time until the game ball released from the first storage unit is discharged is about 3000 to 5000 ms, the first discharge required time T1H is: About 17500 ms to 19500 ms. On the other hand, what is necessary is just to set beforehand so that time T11 before the 2nd storage part opening may be 27000ms, and time T12 before movable member fall may be 22676ms. Therefore, the second required discharge time T2H, which is the required time until the game ball that has passed through the second path 900B is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a, is also longer than the second pre-opening time T11 (for example, 27000 ms). Therefore, it is naturally longer than the first required discharge time T1H (for example, about 17500 ms to 19500 ms). Therefore, after the game ball released from the first storage unit is discharged to the outside of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the storage state (stop state) of the game ball in the second storage unit is released (released), and the game The sphere is guided to the specific winning opening 66A or another side opening 84 through the specific opening 66 or the specific side opening 66b.

  In the bonus release command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, different EXT data depends on the number of continuations of the advantageous state and whether it is the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. Is set. On the side of the effect control board 80, when receiving an accessory release command (step S871; Yes in FIG. 65), various effect control patterns different according to the contents specified by the accessory release command are set (step S872). ), Which is used to execute an effect operation that becomes an effect during small hits in the special effect display. Thus, for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (E) and 74 (E), in the display area of the effect display device 9, an effect image included in the small hit effect based on the reception of the accessory release command is displayed. The production operation is executed. As an example, when the bonus release command indicates that the starting operation is before the final advantageous state based on the special figure game before the final that can be executed in the advantageous state, various effect control patterns are obtained in step S872. CKE1-1 is set. Based on the various effect control patterns CKE1-1 set in this way, an effect image as shown in FIG. 75 (A1) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, etc. It is only necessary to execute the medium performance. As another example, as shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, in the case where the bonus release command indicates that the starting action is in the advantageous state final based on the final special game that can be executed in the advantageous state. In step S872, various effect control patterns CKE1-2 are set. By displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 75 (A2) based on the various effect control patterns CKE1-2 set in this way, it is possible to specify the last state of the advantageous state as well as the number of advantageous state continuations. It is only necessary that the small hit effect to be notified is executed.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (B) and 73 (C) and FIGS. 74 (B) and 74 (C), the first winning combination winning switch 71a and the second winning combination winning are performed until the time T21 after the opening of the winning combination elapses. If none of the switches 72a is turned on and the approaching ball is not detected, the transmission completion detection command transmission setting is performed (step S356 in FIG. 46), and the advantageous state end notification command transmission setting is performed (step S356). S361). When the advantageous control end notification command is received on the side of the production control board 80 (step S893 in FIG. 66; Yes), various production control patterns CKE2-3 are set (step S894), for example, FIG. 75 (B). In the special effect display, the effect at the end of the small hits informing that the advantageous state is completed can be specified together with the number of times of the advantageous state by displaying the effect image as shown in the display area of the effect display device 9 It only has to be executed.

  When the time T22 after the discharge is completed (step S365 in FIG. 47; Yes), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” corresponding to the V winning flag being off (step S369; No). (Step S382). If the start port switch is off when the next timer interrupt occurs (step S201 in FIG. 38; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal process flag is “0” (step S201: No). Step S220).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the normal symbol variable display (fluctuation) in the regular game is not performed at the timing when the post-discharge completion time T22 has elapsed, and the regular diagram process flag is “0”. If “” (step S220 in FIG. 38; Yes), transmission setting of a customer waiting demonstration display command is performed (step S222). On the side of the effect control board 80, after executing the effect at the end of the small hit, there is no reception of the usual figure variation pattern designation command (step S906; No), while there is no reception of the big hit notification command (step 908; No). When the customer waiting demonstration display command is received (step S910; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” (step S911), and the start of the decoration symbol variation is waited (FIG. 61). Step S700). Then, as shown in FIG. 73D, when the variable symbol display is started in the ordinary game after the discharge completion time T22 has elapsed, the ordinary diagram display result designation command and the ordinary diagram variation pattern designation command are displayed. In response to the transmission, the decorative symbol variable display is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74D, for example, the variable symbol display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal game is being executed at the timing when the post-discharge completion time T22 has elapsed, and the normal graph process flag is “0”. Otherwise (step S220 in FIG. 38; No), the customer waiting demonstration display command transmission setting is not performed. At this time, based on the fact that the small hit gaming state has ended and the value of the special figure process flag has become “0” (step S514 in FIG. 55; Yes), the special effect display returns to the normal effect display, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The pattern change process at the time of return to normal map change for performing variable display of this is executed (step S516). For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), it is the remaining time (remaining execution time) of the normal game at the timing when the post-discharge completion time T22 has elapsed and the value of the special figure process flag becomes “0”. The normal fluctuation remaining time T50 is specified (step S653 in FIG. 56). Based on the specified normal map remaining time T50 and the like, the normal map change pattern is determined (steps S654 to S667 in FIG. 56, steps S670 to S677 in FIG. 57). Thereby, the variable display of the decorative pattern included in the normal effect display can be executed in a different effect mode in accordance with the general figure change remaining time T50 at the timing when the special effect display is ended.

  Subsequently, the process waits until the normal time fluctuation remaining time T50 and the normal time fluctuation time T51 match (step S518 in FIG. 55; No). In this standby period, since there is no reception of any of the usual figure variation pattern designation command, the jackpot notification command, and the customer waiting demonstration display command on the side of the effect control board 80 (Step S906 in FIG. 66; No and Step S908; No and Step 910; No) By repeating the processing of Steps S900 to S904 until the production end standby flag is set to the on state in Step S905 (Step S899; No), at the end of the small hit What is necessary is just to make it extend and perform. As described above, the execution time of the effect at the end of the small hits can be changed according to the time difference between the normal time fluctuation remaining time T50 and the normal time fluctuation time T51. Even after the production end standby flag is set to the on state in step S905, the small hit is not received until any of the usual figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the big hit notification command, or the customer waiting demonstration display command is received. It is only necessary that the production operation that is the production at the end is continuously executed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), when the remaining time (remaining execution time) of the usual game matches the usual time fluctuation time T51 according to the usual figure fluctuation pattern (step S518 in FIG. 55; Yes). Then, transmission setting of a general map display result notification command (step S519) and transmission setting of a general map variation pattern designation command are performed (step S520). Thus, in response to the transmission of the general drawing display result designation command or the common figure variation pattern designation command, it is possible to start variable display of decorative symbols included in the normal effect display.

  In the jackpot end command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, different EXT data is set according to the number of continuations of the advantageous state. On the side of the effect control board 80, for example, in the effect processing after the big hit in step S710 shown in FIG. 61, among the various types of effect control patterns as shown in FIG. Then, various effect control patterns CSE3-1 or various effect control patterns CSE3-2 used for the big hit end effect are selected and set. Thereby, as the big hit end effect in the special effect display, in response to the continuous advantageous count value being updated according to the number of times the advantageous state is continued (steps S427 to S429 in FIG. 50, etc.) It can be executed by a predetermined production device.

  As an example, when the advantageous state is newly started in response to the continuous advantageous count value being “1”, various effect control patterns CSE3-1 are set. Based on the various effect control patterns CSE3-1 set in this way, notification is made that an advantageous state is newly started, such as displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 76 (A) in the display area of the effect display device 9. The jackpot end effect is executed. On the other hand, in response to the continuous advantageous count value being other than “1”, the advantageous state is once ended when the control to the big hit gaming state is started, and then again after the big hit gaming state is ended. When the advantageous state is controlled, various effect control patterns CSE3-2 are set. Based on the various effect control patterns CSE3-2 set in this way, the fact that an advantageous image such as that shown in FIG. The big hit end effect to be notified is executed.

  Such a jackpot end effect is also included in the special effect display executed based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game, and when the execution of the jackpot end effect is completed, the variable symbol display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal figure game is performed. If the normal drawing process flag value is other than “0” during execution, the display is returned to the normal effect display in the same manner as the execution of the effect at the end of the small hit, and the decorative symbol variable display, etc. It suffices if processing for performing the above is executed. And the execution time of the big hit end effect may be changed according to the time difference between the normal figure fluctuation remaining time T50 and the normal figure fluctuation time T51, similarly to the execution time of the big hit end effect. .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, when the execution of the special effect display is started, until the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, step S700 shown in FIG. Since the process of S703 is not executed, the special effect display based on the variable display of the special symbol in the special game is executed with priority over the normal effect display based on the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal game. When the execution of the special effect display is completed, if the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal game is being executed and the value of the normal process flag is other than “0”, step S516 shown in FIG. 55 is performed. As a result of the pattern change process at the time of return to normal fluctuation being executed at, a plurality of types of normal figure fluctuation patterns are selected according to the normal figure fluctuation remaining time T50 as the remaining time (remaining execution time) in the variable symbol display. Decide on either. Thus, when the special effect display that is preferentially executed is completed, the normal effect such as the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game that is being executed by the normal symbol display 10 is performed. Appropriate execution of the display enhances the fun of the game by enhancing the player's expectation for the effect of the normal effect display and whether or not the result of the normal map display is “per normal map”. Can be made.

  56 and 57, when the normal map display result is “general map loss” and the normal map fluctuation remaining time T50 is within the range of 4000 ms to less than 31000 ms, Any one of the general map variation pattern PA1-1 to the general map variation pattern PA1-4, the general map variation pattern PA2-1, and the general map variation pattern PA2-2 is determined as the usage pattern. Also, when the normal map display result is “per normal map” and the normal map fluctuation remaining time T50 is in the range of 19000 ms or more and less than 31000 ms, any of the normal map change pattern PA3-1 and the general map change pattern PA3-2 Is determined as a usage pattern. These normal pattern variation patterns may be determined as usage patterns even in the process of step S493 shown in FIG. 54. When the special effect display is not executed, the decorative pattern variable display is started, The common pattern variation pattern is common in the case where the decorative display variable display is started when the effect display ends and returns to the normal effect display. As a result, when the special effect display is ended and the normal effect display is restored, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated general pattern variation pattern corresponding to the remaining time (remaining execution time) in the variable symbol display. Further, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity for executing the normal effect display.

  When the effect at the end of the small hit is executed, it is determined in the processes of steps S906, S908, and S910 shown in FIG. 66 that none of the normal variation pattern designation command, the big hit notification command, or the customer waiting demonstration display command has been received. In response to this, by repeatedly executing the processing of steps S900 to S904, the execution time of the effect at the end of the small hit is changed according to the time difference between the normal figure fluctuation remaining time T50 and the normal figure fluctuation time T51. Until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern is started, the effect at the end of the small hit is extended and executed. This prevents the production from being interrupted before the start of the variable display of decorative designs that will be the normal production display, and the normal production display that is executed after the special production display ends even with a few regular pattern fluctuation patterns. It is possible to cope with this, and it is possible to more effectively prevent an increase in the data capacity for executing the normal performance display.

  When the special figure display result in the special figure game is “small hit”, the bonus game device 20 in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the small hit game state after the derivation display (definite display) of the special figure display result is completed. The opening time T03 before the opening of the entrance opening / closing operation (starting operation) is different depending on the type of the opening display result, such as the symbol number of the small hit symbol derived and displayed in the special game. Become. On the other hand, after the derivation display of the special figure display result is completed, the storage state (resting state) of the game balls in the first storage unit is released when a certain time, which is the first storage unit opening time T10, has elapsed. (Release), and the storage state (stop state) of the game balls in the second storage unit is released (released) when a certain time that is the time T11 before opening the second storage unit has elapsed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to specify the start timing of the start operation. On the other hand, even if the start timing of the start operation cannot be specified, the timing at which the stationary state in the first storage unit or the second storage unit is released is constant, so that the game ball is awarded a specific prize at the start operation start timing. The possibility of entering (V winning) into the mouth 66A is not affected. This effectively prevents an illegal act of aiming at the game ball to enter (V prize) the specific prize opening 66A as a specific area based on the start timing of the start operation, and the game ball regardless of the start timing of the start operation. Can increase the sense of expectation to enter the specific winning opening 66A (V winning) and improve the interest of the game.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions 9L, 9C, and 9R provided in the display area of the effect display device 9, for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs each process in steps S700 to S703 shown in FIG. , Etc., for example, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, the decorative symbols are variably displayed and the display results are displayed in correspondence with the normal symbol variable display in the normal game on the normal symbol display 10. The determined decorative design is derived and displayed. Then, the special start formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 when the normal display result in the general game is “per 1st normal” or “per 2nd general”. The start winning opening which becomes an area is changed from a closed state where the game ball cannot enter to an open state where the game ball can enter. Thereby, the stage effect until the start winning opening becomes an open state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the CPU 56 determines the normal fluctuation pattern in step S493 in FIG. 54, the CPU 56 selects one of the normal fluctuation fluctuation pattern determination table 134A, the reach fluctuation pattern determination table 134B, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern determination table 134C. By referencing, etc., the reach effect mode corresponding to the general map variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types at different ratios depending on the determination result of whether or not the general map display result is “per standard map”. . Then, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the same symbol determination table 140A to determine the reach corresponding to the common pattern variation pattern when determining the decorative symbol that is the same symbol in the reach state in step S805 of FIG. The types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the reach state, such as the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols constituting the reach state, are determined at different rates depending on the production mode. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the feeling of expectation that the result of the usual figure display will be “per ordinary figure” according to the types of decorative symbols constituting the reach state.

  The game ball guided to the upper surface of the rotator 86 via the second path 900B is specified with a higher probability than the game ball guided to the front side of the rotator 86 via the first path 900A. The winning area 66A is won and detected by the specific area switch 66a. Of the game balls that have entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the first discharge required time T1H until the game ball that has passed through the first path 900A is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a is the second path 900B. Is configured to be shorter than the second required discharge time T2H until the game ball is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. In addition, when the variable storage ball device 20 is changed to the open state by the start operation and the second storage portion opening time T11 longer than the first discharge required time T1H elapses, The storage state (stop state) is released (released). Thereby, it is possible to step up a sense of expectation that the game ball enters the specific winning opening 66A as a specific area (V winning) and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the second path 900B, a movable member 77 is provided for advancing to the front of the display area of the effect display device 9 to guide the game ball to the specific winning opening 66A or the other side opening 84. And when the storage state (rest state) of the game ball by the second storage part is released (released), the arrangement of the movable member 77 is changed, and the left end portion is inclined downward as shown in FIG. As a result, the display area of the effect display device 9 is advanced forward. Thereby, it is possible to effectively enhance the expectation that the game ball will enter the specific winning opening 66A that is a specific area (V winning) and be controlled to the big hit gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, assignment of the decision values in the general chart display result decision table 130 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 18A. For example, when the gaming state is in an advantageous state, almost all decision values (or decision values). May be assigned to the result of displaying a general map of “per common map” such as “per first general map” or “per second general map”. In this case, when the gaming state is in the advantageous state, the result of displaying the general diagram in the general game is determined to be “per standard” with a probability close to 100% (or a probability of 100%). .

  The assignment of the decision value in the special figure display result decision table 131 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 19. For example, the decision value may be assigned to the special figure display result of “special figure losing”. Good. If the special figure display result is “special figure loss”, for example, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” after executing the process of step S257 shown in FIG. Control may be performed so that the next special figure game can be executed without being controlled to the winning game state or the big hit game state.

  Each process of steps S328 to S342 shown in FIG. 44 may be executed only when the game ball passes through the corresponding route among the first route 900A and the second route 900B. For example, the processes of steps S328 to S331 are executed only when a game ball passes through the first path 900A, while the processes of steps S332 to S342 are performed only when the game ball passes through the second path 900B. As long as it is executed. In this case, for example, it is identified that the first prize winning switch 71a is determined to be on in step S313 in FIG. 42 and that the second prize winning switch 72a is determined to be on in step S316. What is necessary is just to determine which of the processes of steps S328 to S342 is executed according to the state (on or off) of the flag provided as possible.

  Regardless of whether or not the special figure process flag is “0” in step S470 shown in FIG. 53, the process of step S471 is executed to transmit the common chart display result notification command, and step S494 shown in FIG. Regardless of whether or not the normal fluctuation effect invalid flag is on, the process of step S495 may be executed to transmit the normal fluctuation pattern designation command. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 80, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the special effect display that is executed with priority over the normal effect display is being executed. For example, the ordinary pattern change effect control pattern or the like as in step S811 shown in FIG. 62 is not determined. At this time, for example, it is only necessary to measure the elapsed time until the normal time change time corresponding to the normal time change pattern indicated in the normal time change pattern designation command is reached. Then, for example, when the execution of the effect at the end of the big hit is completed in the after-hit effect processing in step S707 shown in FIG. 61, or when the execution of the big-hit end effect is completed in the after-hit effect processing in step S710. The result of determining the normal map change pattern by determining the control control pattern during normal map change according to the remaining time until the elapsed time in the normal game reaches the normal map change time at the time the display is finished Regardless of the above, it is only necessary to determine the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in accordance with the normal map display result and the remaining time. As an example, a normal variation changing effect control pattern corresponding to the normal variation variation pattern determined by referring to the universal variation return pattern determination table 134D shown in FIG. 23C used in the above embodiment is determined. For example, a decision table is stored in advance in an effect control ROM or the like. Then, it is only necessary that the effect control CPU 101 can determine the effect control pattern at the time of changing the map by referring to this determination table based on the normal map display result and the remaining time. At this time, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the universal pattern change return pattern determination process as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 described as being executed in step S516 of FIG. As the processing to be performed, a process in which the pattern change process at the time of normal figure change return is adapted to the determination of the effect control pattern at the time of normal figure change may be executed by the CPU 101 for effect control. In addition, the remaining time until the elapsed time in the ordinary game becomes the ordinary time variation time matches the effect time corresponding to each ordinary time variation production control pattern (corresponding to the ordinary time variation time T51 of the ordinary diagram variation pattern). In the period up to this time, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, it is only necessary that an effect operation that is a predetermined special effect display such as a small hit end effect or a big hit end effect is continuously executed.

  In the embodiment described above, step S700 to step S703 and part of step S704 (for example, steps S841 to S843 and S847 shown in FIG. 64) are included in the effect control process shown in FIG. S848 to S854 and S859 to S861 are executed as a process for controlling an effect operation (normal effect display or the like) based on a normal game using the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10. Is done. On the other hand, in the effect control process shown in FIG. 61, a part of the process of step S704 (for example, the process of steps S848 to S858 and S861 is executed based on the process of steps S844 to S847 shown in FIG. 64). Etc.), and the processing of steps S705 to S710 is executed as a process for controlling an effect operation (special effect display or the like) based on the special symbol game using the special symbol on the special symbol display 8. On the other hand, a process process executed for controlling the production operation based on the ordinary game and a process process executed for controlling the production operation based on the special game are separately provided in FIG. In the production control main process as shown, each process process may be executed sequentially. In this case, when the process process executed to control the rendering operation based on the special figure game proceeds (for example, when the value of the process flag is updated to a value other than “0”), for example, Display control of the effect image used in the special effect display may be performed. On the other hand, when the process process executed to control the rendering operation based on the special figure game returns to the initial state (for example, when the value of the process flag becomes “0”), the normal game In addition to the process of specifying the normal figure variation remaining time of the normal symbol in FIG. 1, the process process executed for controlling the effect operation based on the general game progresses, and for example, display control of the effect image used in the normal effect display ( The decorative display variable display control and the like may be performed. In the process process for controlling the rendering action based on the ordinary game, for example, the process process for controlling the rendering action based on the special game before selecting and executing the process corresponding to the value of the process flag. It is determined whether or not an effect operation such as a special effect display is being executed by checking the value of the process flag referred to in the above. At this time, if it is determined that the process is being executed, the measurement process or the like for specifying the normal fluctuation remaining time is executed, while the process process may be maintained in the initial state. In addition, when the process for controlling the rendering operation based on the ordinary game is in progress, commands related to the special game (for example, special graphic variation pattern designation command and special graphic display result notification command) are sent from the main board 31. When a jackpot notification command, an accessory release command, etc.) are transmitted, the progress of the process processing is stopped so that the effect operation based on the usual game is not executed. Thereby, for example, the complicated progress setting of the process processing such as steps S857, S858, and S860 of the post-per-game effect processing shown in FIG. 64 can be eliminated. It is possible to easily and appropriately control the production operation based on the above.

  In the above embodiment, by executing the normal pattern change return time pattern determination process as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the normal map change time among the normal map change patterns shorter than the normal map change time T50. It has been described that the pattern having the longest T51 is determined as the use pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a pattern variation time T51 that is closest to the diagram variation remaining time T50 (a time difference is short) is used among a plurality of types of typical map variation patterns prepared in advance. The pattern may be determined. In this case, the normal time fluctuation time T51 may be longer than the normal time fluctuation remaining time T50. Therefore, the normal figure fluctuation time T51 in the normal figure fluctuation pattern may be shortened according to the normal figure fluctuation remaining time T50, or the normal figure fluctuation remaining time may be extended according to the normal figure fluctuation time T51. May be. Alternatively, when the usual figure fluctuation remaining time T50 has elapsed, the system waits until the usual figure fluctuation time T51 has elapsed (the next ordinary figure game execution is suspended), and a predetermined rendering operation corresponding to the waiting period is executed. You may make it do.

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration of the universal figure return pattern determination table 134D as shown in FIG. 23C, or the CPU 56 returns the universal figure change return as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 in step S516 of FIG. It has been described that, by executing the time pattern determination process, when the normal figure fluctuation remaining time T50 is within a predetermined time range, it is determined as one normal figure fluctuation pattern previously associated with the time range. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a pattern to be used may be determined from among a plurality of types of usual pattern variation patterns previously associated with each time range. As an example, in the normal pattern change return pattern determination table 134D, a numerical value (determined) that is compared with the random number MR5 for determining the normal pattern change pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining normal map time is within a predetermined time range. Value) is assigned to one of a plurality of types of common pattern fluctuation patterns. Then, in the normal figure change return pattern determination process executed in step S516, when the normal figure change remaining time T50 is within a predetermined time range, for example, the random counter of the random number circuit 503 or the game control counter setting unit 154 is used. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the normal variation pattern is extracted from the numerical data updated by the above. Based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 extracted in this way, the normal variation pattern may be determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the normal variation return pattern determination table 134D. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a normal effect display such as a variable display of decorative symbols in various effect modes according to the normal figure remaining time T50, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the above embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, for example, the processing in step S265 shown in FIG. 40 or the processing in step S377 shown in FIG. The control according to the situation (for example, change of the determination ratio of the normal map display result in step S465 shown in FIG. 53) is terminated. On the other hand, when the small hit game state is controlled, the control corresponding to the advantageous state is not ended. When the advantageous state end flag is on in step S359 shown in FIG. 46, the process of step S363 is performed. Just execute and end the advantage. On the other hand, when the small hit gaming state is controlled, the control corresponding to the advantageous state may be temporarily ended. For example, even when it is determined in step S258 shown in FIG. 40 that the big hit flag is off, the advantageous state may be terminated by clearing the advantageous state flag and turning it off. At this time, for example, the advantageous state counter is not cleared, and if the advantageous state count value at the end of the small hit gaming state is other than “0”, the advantageous state flag is set to the ON state again, The control corresponding to the advantageous state may be resumed.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the big winning opening that is changed between the open state and the closed state by the opening / closing plate 16 is provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a round in which the first winning entrance 71 and the second entering entrance 72 in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 are used as big winning openings, and the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened in the big hit gaming state. It may be performed. Moreover, you may make it use both the big prize opening opened and closed by the opening-and-closing board 16, and the big prize opening opened and closed by the variable prize ball apparatus 20. FIG. In this case, for example, the big winning opening to be opened may be switched according to the success or failure of various conditions such as the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state and the number of times of execution of the round. As an example, when switching the winning prize opening to be opened according to the number of rounds executed, the odd winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening / closing plate 16 is opened in the odd-numbered round, and the variable winning prize in the even-numbered round. The big prize opening opened and closed by the ball device 20 may be opened. Or you may make it switch the big prize opening made into an open state according to the determination result of the number of rounds at the big hit. For example, when the number of rounds at the big hit is “5”, the big prize opening opened and closed by the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened, and the round number at the big hit is “10” or “15”. The open prize opening opened and closed by the opening / closing plate 16 may be opened.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S204 shown in FIG. 38 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the number of rounds in the big hit, which is the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state, is always “15. It was explained that it is set to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the special figure display result is “big hit”, for example, based on numerical data indicating a random value obtained by the CPU 56 from the random number circuit 503 or the random counter, etc. The number of rounds may be determined as any one prepared in advance. Alternatively, in the special figure display result determination table 131, a portion where the special figure display result is “big hit” may be set so as to include a plurality of types of “big hit” having different numbers of rounds at the big hit.

  In the above embodiment, the special symbol display 8 does not store the special symbol game and determines that the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is on in step S201 in FIG. It explained as a special figure game using special symbols being executed. On the other hand, the special-purpose game may be reserved and stored as in the ordinary game. When the normal map display result is “per normal map”, a special game is suspended in response to the detection of a game ball that has entered (passed through) the start winning opening that has changed from the closed state to the open state. In step S201 of FIG. 38, it is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a special game hold memory. At this time, if there is a pending storage, the pending data corresponding to the first entry (for example, numeric data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the special figure display result) is read, and the processes of steps S202 and S204 to S219 are executed. Thus, it may be determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”. Further, a special symbol hold memory indicator may be provided at a predetermined position in the game area 7 to display the number of reserved memories (the number of special figure hold memories) as the number of effective winning balls won in the start winning opening. The special symbol holding storage display unit is configured to include four display units such as four LEDs, for example, and increases the number of display units that are turned on each time there is an effective start winning. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the above embodiment, when the universal map display result is determined to be “per common map”, regardless of whether the type per general map is “per first general map” or “per second general map”. In the above description, it is determined that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbols is determined to be the reach state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the per-common symbol type is “per first general symbol”, the decorative symbol variable display state may or may not reach the reach state. It may be. For example, when the game state is the normal state, the random number value MR4 for reach determination is extracted when the base map display result is “per normal map” and the per base map type is determined as “per first base map”. Then, by referring to the reach determination table 133 stored in the ROM 54, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. Alternatively, when the common event type is determined to be “per first map”, it is determined whether or not to reach the reach state by referring to the hit reach determination table different from the reach determination table 133. May be. Here, in the hit reach determination table, for example, more determination values than the setting in the reach determination table 133 may be set to be assigned to the determination result of “reach”. Or, when the game state is the normal state and the type per base figure is determined to be “per 1st base figure”, the start opening time may be as short as 100 ms, and the game ball may enter the start winning opening. Since it is difficult, it may be determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbols is not always the reach state. As a result, after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is reached and the player's expectation is increased, the normal per-game type is “per 1st normal” in the normal state. It is possible to prevent a game ball from entering and prevent the interest of the game from declining. When determining whether or not to execute the changing notice effect, or when determining the effect operation when executing the changing notice effect, depending on whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state One or both of the decisions may be made at different rates. As a result, depending on whether or not the changing notice effect is executed, and depending on the contents of the producing action that becomes the changing notice effect, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may become the reach state or in the normal state. The possibility that the classification per figure will be “per second map” can be varied.

  In the embodiment described above, the VDP 109 is mounted on the effect control board 80, and the display operation in the effect display device 9 is controlled under the control of the effect control board 80. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display control board on which a microcomputer is mounted may be provided separately from the effect control board 80, and the VDP 109 or the like may be mounted on the display control board. . In this case, the display control board receives a control signal from the presentation control board 80 by a microcomputer configured separately from the presentation control microcomputer 100, and outputs predetermined display control data corresponding to the control signal. Various controls may be performed by referring to them.

  In the above embodiment, the special symbol using the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8 based on the fact that the game ball which has won the starting prize opening formed by the normally variable prize winning ball device 61 is detected by the starting mouth switch 60. Described as a game run. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of (for example, two) special symbol display devices may be provided to execute a special symbol game using a plurality of special symbols. As an example, based on the fact that a game ball that has won a first start winning opening provided in the game area 7 is detected by a first start opening switch, a special figure using the first special figure by the first special symbol display is used. The figure game is executed. Further, based on the fact that a game ball won in a second start winning opening provided separately from the first start winning opening in the game area 7 is detected by the second start opening switch, the second special symbol display is used. A special figure game using the second special figure is executed. In this case, the determination ratio of the special figure display result may be different between the special figure game using the first special figure and the special figure game using the second special figure. In addition, among the special game using the first special figure and the special game using the second special figure, the special figure display result that can be determined in one special figure game includes the other special figure game. You may set so that the special figure display result which cannot be determined is included. As an example, in the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure display result is determined as either “big hit” or “first small hit” to “seventh small hit”, while the second special figure is displayed. In the special figure game using the figure, the special figure display result may be determined as “big hit” or “special figure loss”.

  In the above embodiment, when the normal symbol display result that is the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol game on the normal symbol display 10 becomes “per normal symbol”, the start winning opening becomes open and the game ball Explained that it would be possible to win a prize. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a start winning opening formed using a ball receiving member or the like that can always win a prize may be provided regardless of the normal display result. In addition, a start winning opening that can be always awarded may be provided together with a starting winning opening that is open when the normal figure display result becomes “per normal figure” and is open.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the various display operations including the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 do not depart from the spirit of the invention. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made within the range. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 8 ... Special symbol display 9 ... Production display device 10 ... Normal symbol display 16 ... Opening / closing plate 20 ... Variable winning ball device 23 ... Count switch 27 ... Speaker 31 ... Main board 35 ... Lamp driver board 56 ... CPU
60 ... Start port switch 61 ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 66A ... Specific winning port 66a ... Specific area switch 70 ... Audio output board 71 ... First entrance 71a ... First prize winning switch 72 ... Second entrance 72a ... First 2nd prize winning switch 76A ... 1st open door 76B ... 2nd open door 77 ... Movable member 78 ... Decoration member 80 ... Production control board 85a ... Accompaniment discharge switch 86 ... Rotating body 93a ... 1st storage member 93b ... 2nd Storage member 100 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Production control CPU
109… VDP
120 ... Operation buttons 560 ... Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

Variable starting means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can pass through the starting region and a second state in which the game medium cannot pass, a first special state advantageous to the player, and a second special state disadvantageous to the player Special state variable means that can change to the first special state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area, and the special state variable means inside the special state variable means A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined gaming value based on the passing situation of gaming media in
Whether or not the variable start means is changed to the first state, and whether or not the first variable state is changed to the first state in a manner in which the game medium easily passes through the start area, or more than the first variable state. First determining means for determining whether or not to enter the second variable state to change to the first state in a manner in which the game medium is difficult to pass through the starting area;
Second determination means for determining whether or not to change the special state variable means to the first special state,
The second determining means, regardless of whether the game medium has passed through the start area when in the first variable state or whether the game medium has passed through the start area when in the second variable state, Determining whether to change the special state variable means to the first special state according to a common process;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images